Communications Network Management System

Communications NetworkManagement System

ProvisioningUser Guide

Version 8.17

C3C® Provisioning Guide

.Use or disclosure of of information contained in this page is subject to the restrictions in Page i of this document

i

CopyrightRIGHTS AND RESTRICTIONS

Strata Group proprietary rights are included in this document and the information disclosed therein. This document,regardless of the form in which it exists, may not be used by or disclosed for any purpose except as specifically authorizedin writing by Strata Group.

Copyright 1994 - 2006 Strata Group, Inc. Unpublished - Rights reserved under the copyright laws by Strata Group.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVEDThis document contains proprietary data that is protected by copyright under the Berne Convention and the UniversalCopyright Convention. No part of this document may be transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Strata Group.

TRADEMARKS

C3C® is a trademark of Strata Group, Inc.



ii

1 About This Guide.......................................................................................1-11.1 PURPOSE.................................................................................................................................................................1-11.2 ORGANIZATION ......................................................................................................................................................1-11.3 CONVENTIONS USED IN THE GUIDE ........................................................................................................................1-1

2 Introduction................................................................................................2-12.1 OVERVIEW..............................................................................................................................................................2-12.2 THE USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................................2-1

2.2.1 Windows Look and Feel.................................................................................................................................2-12.2.1.1 Using the Mouse ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-12.2.1.2 Using Keyboard Shortcuts .......................................................................................................................................... 2-22.2.1.3 Graphical User Interface Notes ................................................................................................................................... 2-2

3 Getting Started ..........................................................................................3-13.1 LOGGING IN............................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Buttons ...........................................................................................................................................................3-13.1.1.1 Settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.2 LOGGING OUT ........................................................................................................................................................3-23.3 ON-LINE HELP........................................................................................................................................................3-23.4 CHANGING YOUR PASSWORD.................................................................................................................................3-2

3.4.1 Change Password window.............................................................................................................................3-2

4 The C3C® Workspace...............................................................................4-14.1 WORKSPACE COMPONENTS....................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Title Bar .........................................................................................................................................................4-14.1.2 Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.2.1 File .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-24.1.2.2 Tools ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24.1.2.3 Window....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24.1.2.4 Help............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4.1.3 Tool Bar.........................................................................................................................................................4-34.1.4 Auth Code Manager.......................................................................................................................................4-3

4.1.4.1 5ESS Auth Code Details ............................................................................................................................................. 4-44.1.4.2 DMS100 / CS2KAuth Code Details............................................................................................................................ 4-44.1.4.3 EWSD Auth Code Details........................................................................................................................................... 4-54.1.4.4 Auth Code Bulk Procesing.......................................................................................................................................... 4-6

4.1.5 Find Tool .......................................................................................................................................................4-84.1.5.1 Finding a Station with the Find Tool........................................................................................................................... 4-84.1.5.2 Finding an Order with the Find Tool........................................................................................................................... 4-8

5 Provisioning ...............................................................................................5-15.1 ABOUT PROVISIONING............................................................................................................................................5-15.2 PROVISIONING METHOD OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................................5-15.3 STATION EXPLORER ...............................................................................................................................................5-1

5.3.1 Tool Button Bar .............................................................................................................................................5-15.3.2 Selection Panel ..............................................................................................................................................5-2

5.3.2.1 Station Finder Tab....................................................................................................................................................... 5-25.3.2.2 Advanced Query ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.2.2.1 Station Attributes Select Panel ............................................................................................................................. 5-45.3.2.2.2 Station Features Select panel................................................................................................................................ 5-45.3.2.2.3 Query panel .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-55.3.2.2.4 Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5

Button.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5Description ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-5



iii

5.3.2.3 Station Folders Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-55.3.3 Display Panel.................................................................................................................................................5-65.3.4 Organizing Stations in Folders......................................................................................................................5-6

5.4 STATION EDITOR ....................................................................................................................................................5-65.4.1 Title Bar .........................................................................................................................................................5-75.4.2 Tool Button Bar .............................................................................................................................................5-75.4.3 General Tab (Station on DMS Switch) ..........................................................................................................5-8

5.4.3.1 Input Panel .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-85.4.3.2 Checkbox Options....................................................................................................................................................... 5-95.4.3.3 Message Boxes............................................................................................................................................................ 5-9

5.4.4 General Tab (From Disconnect) on a DMS / CS2K Switch...........................................................................5-95.4.5 General Tab (Station on CS2K Switch) .......................................................................................................5-10

5.4.5.1 Input Panel .................................................................................................................................................................5-115.4.5.2 Checkbox Options......................................................................................................................................................5-125.4.5.3 Message Boxes...........................................................................................................................................................5-12

5.4.6 General Tab (Station on 5ESS Switch) ........................................................................................................5-125.4.6.1 Input Panel .................................................................................................................................................................5-135.4.6.2 Checkbox Panel .........................................................................................................................................................5-145.4.6.3 Message Boxes...........................................................................................................................................................5-14

5.4.7 General Tab (Station on EWSD Switch) ......................................................................................................5-145.4.7.1 Input Panel .................................................................................................................................................................5-155.4.7.2 Checkbox Panel .........................................................................................................................................................5-155.4.7.3 Message Boxes...........................................................................................................................................................5-15

5.4.8 General Tab (Station on CS1K switch)........................................................................................................5-155.4.8.1 Input Panel .................................................................................................................................................................5-165.4.8.2 Checkbox Panel .........................................................................................................................................................5-165.4.8.3 Message Boxes...........................................................................................................................................................5-17

5.4.9 Features Tab (Station on DMS switch)........................................................................................................5-175.4.9.1 Station Model Panel ...................................................................................................................................................5-185.4.9.2 Feature Detail Panel ...................................................................................................................................................5-18

5.4.9.2.1 Features ...............................................................................................................................................................5-195.4.9.2.2 DN Browser.........................................................................................................................................................5-195.4.9.2.3 Feature Palette .....................................................................................................................................................5-20

5.4.9.3 Message Boxes...........................................................................................................................................................5-205.4.9.4 Error and Warning Messages .....................................................................................................................................5-20

5.4.10 Features Tab (Station on CS2K switch).......................................................................................................5-215.4.10.1 Station Model Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-225.4.10.2 Feature Detail Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-22

Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-22Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-22

5.4.10.2.1 Features .............................................................................................................................................................5-23Icon.................................................................................................................................................................................5-23Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-23

5.4.10.2.2 DN Browser ......................................................................................................................................................5-23Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-23Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-23

5.4.10.2.3 Feature Palette...................................................................................................................................................5-24Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-24Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-24

5.4.10.3 Message Boxes ......................................................................................................................................................5-245.4.10.4 Error and Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................5-24

5.4.11 Features Tab (Station on 5ESS switch)........................................................................................................5-255.4.11.1 Station Model Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-265.4.11.2 Feature Detail Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-26


5.4.11.2.1 Key Feature tab .................................................................................................................................................5-275.4.11.2.2 Features .............................................................................................................................................................5-27

5.4.11.2.2.1 Adding Features ........................................................................................................................................5-285.4.11.2.2.2 Deleting Features.......................................................................................................................................5-285.4.11.2.2.3 Feature States and Prompts........................................................................................................................5-28



iv

Indicator .........................................................................................................................................................................5-28Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-28



5.4.11.2.5 Config Group tab ..............................................................................................................................................5-305.4.11.2.6 Feature Group tab..............................................................................................................................................5-30

5.4.11.3 Message Boxes ......................................................................................................................................................5-305.4.11.4 Error and Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................5-315.4.11.5 Station Model Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-315.4.11.6 Feature Detail Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-31


5.4.11.6.1 Key-Feature tab.................................................................................................................................................5-32Indicator .........................................................................................................................................................................5-33Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-33



5.4.11.6.4 Key Management tab ........................................................................................................................................5-345.4.11.7 Message Boxes ......................................................................................................................................................5-345.4.11.8 Error and Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................5-35

5.4.12 Feature Tab (Station on CS1K Switch)........................................................................................................5-355.4.12.1 Station Model Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-355.4.12.2 Feature Detail Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-36


5.4.12.2.1 Key-Feature tab.................................................................................................................................................5-36Indicator .........................................................................................................................................................................5-37Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-37



5.4.12.2.4 Config Group tab ..............................................................................................................................................5-385.4.12.3 Message Boxes ......................................................................................................................................................5-395.4.12.4 Error and Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................5-39

5.4.13 Directory Tab (Station on any Switch) ........................................................................................................5-395.4.14 Assigning Feature Packages to a Station ....................................................................................................5-40

5.4.14.1 The Station dialog box...........................................................................................................................................5-405.4.14.1.1 The Station dialog box General tab ...................................................................................................................5-415.4.14.1.2 The Station dialog box Features tab ..................................................................................................................5-41

5.5 GROUP EXPLORER ................................................................................................................................................5-425.5.1 5ESS Group Management............................................................................................................................5-435.5.2 Tool Button Bar ...........................................................................................................................................5-435.5.3 Selection Panel ............................................................................................................................................5-435.5.4 Display Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-445.5.5 Group Editor................................................................................................................................................5-45

5.5.5.1.1 Title Bar ..............................................................................................................................................................5-455.5.5.2 Tool Button Bar (Main) .............................................................................................................................................5-45


5.5.5.3 Group Detail Panel.....................................................................................................................................................5-46



v

5.5.5.4 Tool Button Bar - Members .......................................................................................................................................5-46Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-46Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-46

5.5.5.5 Display Panel – Members ..........................................................................................................................................5-475.5.6 Group Wizard ..............................................................................................................................................5-47

5.5.6.1 Group Wizard – General ............................................................................................................................................5-47Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-47Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-47

5.5.6.2 Select Stations to Add ................................................................................................................................................5-475.5.6.3 Assigning Keys ..........................................................................................................................................................5-49

5.5.6.3.1 Key List Selector Window ..................................................................................................................................5-505.5.6.3.2 Key List Selector Buttons....................................................................................................................................5-51


5.5.7 Tool Button Bar ...........................................................................................................................................5-515.5.8 Selection Panel ............................................................................................................................................5-515.5.9 Display Panel...............................................................................................................................................5-525.5.10 DMS/CS2K Group Editor ............................................................................................................................5-53

5.5.10.1.1 Title Bar ............................................................................................................................................................5-535.5.10.2 Tool Button Bar (Main) .........................................................................................................................................5-53


5.5.10.3 Group Detail Panel ................................................................................................................................................5-535.5.10.4 Tool Button Bar - Members...................................................................................................................................5-54


5.5.10.5 Display Panel – Members ......................................................................................................................................5-545.5.11 Group Wizard ..............................................................................................................................................5-55

5.5.11.1 Group Wizard – General........................................................................................................................................5-55Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-55Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-55

5.5.11.2 Select Stations to Add............................................................................................................................................5-555.5.11.3 Assigning Keys......................................................................................................................................................5-57

5.5.11.3.1 Key List Selector Window ................................................................................................................................5-585.5.11.3.2 Key List Selector Buttons .................................................................................................................................5-59


5.5.12 Hunt Group Configuration ..........................................................................................................................5-595.5.12.1 Creating a new Directory Number Hunt group with new stations .........................................................................5-59

5.5.12.1.1 Starting the Group and Creating New Stations..................................................................................................5-595.5.12.1.2 Completing the Group Wizard ..........................................................................................................................5-62

5.5.12.2 Creating a new Directory Line Hunt or Multi-Line Hunt Group with new stations...............................................5-655.6 SUBSCRIBER EXPLORER........................................................................................................................................5-66

5.6.1 Navigating the Subscriber Explorer Console ..............................................................................................5-665.6.1.1 Subscriber Finder .......................................................................................................................................................5-66

5.6.1.1.1 Title Bar ..............................................................................................................................................................5-665.6.1.1.2 Selection Panel ....................................................................................................................................................5-665.6.1.1.3 Display Panel.......................................................................................................................................................5-675.6.1.1.4 Tool Button Bar...................................................................................................................................................5-67

5.6.1.2 Subscriber Folders......................................................................................................................................................5-675.6.2 Creating and Editing MCS ..........................................................................................................................5-68

5.6.2.1 Creating a New Subscriber.........................................................................................................................................5-685.6.2.2 Editing an Existing Subscriber...................................................................................................................................5-68

5.6.2.2.1 Adding MCS as a New Service ...........................................................................................................................5-685.6.2.2.1.1 MCS Editor Main tab ..................................................................................................................................5-695.6.2.2.1.2 MCS Editor Voicemail tab ..........................................................................................................................5-705.6.2.2.1.3 MCS Editor Meet Me Data tab ....................................................................................................................5-715.6.2.2.1.4 MCS Editor Converged Desktop tab ...........................................................................................................5-715.6.2.2.1.5 MCS Editor Routes tab................................................................................................................................5-725.6.2.2.1.6 MCS Editor Unified Communications tab...................................................................................................5-72

5.6.3 Adding Voice as a New Service ...................................................................................................................5-73



vi

5.6.4 Adding SelfCare as a New Service...............................................................................................................5-745.7 ORDERS................................................................................................................................................................5-75

5.7.1 Order Browser .............................................................................................................................................5-765.7.1.1 Title Bar .....................................................................................................................................................................5-765.7.1.2 Tool Button Bar .........................................................................................................................................................5-76


5.7.1.3 Search Options Panel .................................................................................................................................................5-77Order Status....................................................................................................................................................................5-77Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-77Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-77Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-77Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-77Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-77Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-77Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-77Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-78User Option ....................................................................................................................................................................5-78Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-78Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-78User Option ....................................................................................................................................................................5-78Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-78Filter By Option .............................................................................................................................................................5-78User Option ....................................................................................................................................................................5-78Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-78

5.7.1.4 Order List Panel .........................................................................................................................................................5-795.7.1.5 Handling Partial Order Failures .................................................................................................................................5-79

5.7.2 Order Editor ................................................................................................................................................5-795.7.2.1 Title Bar .....................................................................................................................................................................5-805.7.2.2 Tool Button Bar (Main) .............................................................................................................................................5-805.7.2.3 Order Detail Panel......................................................................................................................................................5-815.7.2.4 Tab Panel ...................................................................................................................................................................5-81

Mode button ...................................................................................................................................................................5-81Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-81

5.7.2.5 Actions tab - Stations Mode.......................................................................................................................................5-82Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-82Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-82

5.7.2.5.1 Action List panel - Stations Mode.......................................................................................................................5-825.7.2.6 Actions tab - Groups Mode ........................................................................................................................................5-83


5.7.2.6.1 Action List panel - Groups Mode ........................................................................................................................5-835.7.2.7 Actions tab - Swaps Mode .........................................................................................................................................5-84


5.7.2.7.1 Action List panel - Swaps Mode .........................................................................................................................5-845.7.2.8 Order Change Summary Editor..................................................................................................................................5-84

Button/Item.....................................................................................................................................................................5-85Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-85

5.7.2.9 Swap Editor................................................................................................................................................................5-855.7.2.9.1 Tool Button Bar...................................................................................................................................................5-85


5.7.2.9.2 Swap Editor Rules ...............................................................................................................................................5-855.7.2.9.3 Swap Detail Panel ...............................................................................................................................................5-865.7.2.9.4 Message Panels ...................................................................................................................................................5-86

5.7.2.10 Bulk Edit General ..................................................................................................................................................5-865.7.2.10.1 Task List............................................................................................................................................................5-87

Task ................................................................................................................................................................................5-87Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-87

5.7.2.10.2 Button Bar.........................................................................................................................................................5-87Button.............................................................................................................................................................................5-88



vii

Description .....................................................................................................................................................................5-885.7.2.11 Bulk Edit - Adding a Feature.................................................................................................................................5-88

5.7.2.11.1 Pre-existing Feature Scenario............................................................................................................................5-885.7.2.12 Bulk Edit - Modifying a Feature............................................................................................................................5-895.7.2.13 Bulk Edit - Deleting a Feature ...............................................................................................................................5-905.7.2.14 Bulk Edit - Modifying Station Attributes ..............................................................................................................5-915.7.2.15 Bulk Edit - Changing Station Model .....................................................................................................................5-92

5.7.2.15.1 Incompatible Station Model Scenario ...............................................................................................................5-935.7.2.16 Bulk Edit - Applying Templates ............................................................................................................................5-945.7.2.17 Bulk Edit - Applying Shortcuts .............................................................................................................................5-95

5.7.2.17.1 Change the Call Forward DN............................................................................................................................5-955.8 ADVANCED VOICE SERVICES (AVS) ....................................................................................................................5-95

5.8.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................5-965.8.2 Navigating the AVS Console........................................................................................................................5-965.8.3 The AVS Tool Button Bar.............................................................................................................................5-965.8.4 The Selection Panel: Editing AVS................................................................................................................5-97

5.8.4.1 Meet Me Conference..................................................................................................................................................5-975.8.4.2 Executive Conference ................................................................................................................................................5-985.8.4.3 Preset Conference ......................................................................................................................................................5-995.8.4.4 Network Speed Call ...................................................................................................................................................5-995.8.4.5 Call Forward Reason Display ..................................................................................................................................5-100

6 Reports......................................................................................................6-16.1 PROVISIONING REPORTS .........................................................................................................................................6-16.2 THE REPORT BROWSER ..........................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2.1 Selection Panel ..............................................................................................................................................6-26.2.2 Parameter Panel ............................................................................................................................................6-26.2.3 Options Panel ................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.3.1 Schedule Report .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-36.2.3.1.1 Details tab............................................................................................................................................................. 6-36.2.3.1.2 Date/Times tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-36.2.3.1.3 Job History Tab .................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.2.3.1.3.1 Job Status Details.......................................................................................................................................... 6-66.2.3.2 Sort Criteria................................................................................................................................................................. 6-7

Button/Item...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7Description ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.3 VIEWING AND PRINTING REPORTS..........................................................................................................................6-7Steps ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-7Description ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.4 PROVISIONING REPORT PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................6-76.4.1 Station Reports...............................................................................................................................................6-8

6.4.1.1 Station Reports - 5ESS Switch.................................................................................................................................... 6-96.4.1.2 Station Reports – CS2000/DMS100 Switch................................................................................................................ 6-96.4.1.3 Station Reports – EWSD Switch................................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.4.2 Group Reports ...............................................................................................................................................6-96.4.2.1 Group Reports – 5ESS Switch .................................................................................................................................... 6-96.4.2.2 Group Reports – CS2000/DMS100 Switch................................................................................................................6-106.4.2.3 Group Reports EWSD Switch....................................................................................................................................6-10

6.4.3 Order Reports - All Switch Types ................................................................................................................6-106.5 PROVISIONING REPORT EXAMPLES.......................................................................................................................6-12

6.5.1 Station Report Examples..............................................................................................................................6-126.5.1.1 Station Reports - All Switch Types ............................................................................................................................6-12

6.5.1.1.1 Billable Features Report ......................................................................................................................................6-126.5.1.1.2 Call Forward DN Report .....................................................................................................................................6-13

6.5.1.1.2.1 Call Forward DN Report Detail...................................................................................................................6-146.5.1.1.3 Call Forward Station Report................................................................................................................................6-14

6.5.1.1.3.1 Call Forward Station Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-156.5.1.1.4 Directory Number / Office Equipment Report ....................................................................................................6-15

6.5.1.1.4.1 Directory Number / Office Equipment Report Detail ..................................................................................6-166.5.1.1.5 Directory Information Report..............................................................................................................................6-16



viii

6.5.1.1.5.1 Directory Information Report Detail ......................................................................................................6-176.5.1.1.6 DN Removal Report ............................................................................................................................................6-17

6.5.1.1.6.1 DN Removal Report Detail..........................................................................................................................6-176.5.1.1.7 Features Report ...................................................................................................................................................6-18

6.5.1.1.7.1 Features Report Detail .................................................................................................................................6-186.5.1.1.8 Feature Prompt Value Report ..............................................................................................................................6-18

6.5.1.1.8.1 Feature Prompt Value Report Detail............................................................................................................6-196.5.1.1.9 Feature Limit Report ...........................................................................................................................................6-19

6.5.1.1.9.1 Feature Limit Report detail..........................................................................................................................6-206.5.1.1.10 Historical Station Report...................................................................................................................................6-20

6.5.1.1.10.1 Historical Station Report Detail ................................................................................................................6-216.5.1.1.11 Subscriber Station History Report.....................................................................................................................6-21

6.5.1.1.11.1 Subscriber Station History Report Detail ..................................................................................................6-226.5.1.1.12 Station Template Report ...................................................................................................................................6-22

6.5.1.1.12.1 Station Template Report Detail .................................................................................................................6-236.5.1.1.13 Subscriber Station Report .................................................................................................................................6-24

6.5.1.1.13.1 Subscriber Station Report Detail ...............................................................................................................6-246.5.1.1.14 Subscriber Station Report - Expert View ..........................................................................................................6-25

6.5.1.1.14.1 Subscriber Station Report Expert View Detail ..........................................................................................6-256.5.1.1.15 Subscriber Station Summary Report .................................................................................................................6-26

6.5.1.1.15.1 Subscriber Station Summary Report Detail ......................................................................................6-266.5.1.1.16 Switch Synchronization Report.........................................................................................................................6-27

6.5.1.1.16.1 Switch Sync Report Detail ........................................................................................................................6-276.5.1.1.17 Virtual DN Report.............................................................................................................................................6-28

6.5.1.1.17.1 Virtual DN Report Detail ..........................................................................................................................6-286.5.1.2 Station Reports - 5ESS Switch Type..........................................................................................................................6-29

6.5.1.2.1 Call Appearance Report ......................................................................................................................................6-296.5.1.2.1.1 Call Appearance Report Detail ....................................................................................................................6-29

6.5.1.2.2 Line Class Code Report.......................................................................................................................................6-296.5.1.2.2.1 Line Class Code Report Detail ....................................................................................................................6-30

6.5.1.2.3 Suspend Status Report.........................................................................................................................................6-306.5.1.2.3.1 Suspend Status Report Detail ......................................................................................................................6-30

6.5.1.2.4 Suspended DN Activity Report ...........................................................................................................................6-316.5.1.2.4.1 Suspended DN Activity Report Detail.........................................................................................................6-31

6.5.1.2.5 Suspended DN Summary Report.........................................................................................................................6-316.5.1.2.5.1 Suspended DN Summary Report Detail ......................................................................................................6-32

6.5.1.3 Station Reports - DMS Switch Type..........................................................................................................................6-326.5.1.3.1 CICM Processed Stations Report ........................................................................................................................6-32

6.5.1.3.1.1 CICM Processed Stations Report Detail......................................................................................................6-326.5.1.3.2 Network Class of Service Report ........................................................................................................................6-33

6.5.1.3.2.1 Network Class of Service Report Detail ......................................................................................................6-336.5.1.4 Station Reports – CS2K Switch Type ........................................................................................................................6-33

6.5.1.4.1 CICM Processed Stations Report ........................................................................................................................6-336.5.1.4.1.1 CICM Processed Stations Report Detail......................................................................................................6-33

6.5.1.4.2 Network Class of Service Report ........................................................................................................................6-346.5.1.4.2.1 Network Class of Service Report Detail ......................................................................................................6-34

6.5.1.5 EWSD Station Reports...............................................................................................................................................6-346.5.1.5.1 Line Class Code Report.......................................................................................................................................6-34

6.5.1.5.1.1 Line Class Code Report Detail ....................................................................................................................6-356.5.2 Group Report Examples...............................................................................................................................6-35

6.5.2.1 Group Reports - 5ESS Switch Type...........................................................................................................................6-356.5.2.1.1 Authorization Group Report................................................................................................................................6-35

6.5.2.1.1.1 Authorization Group Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-356.5.2.1.2 BRCS Feature Group Report...............................................................................................................................6-35

6.5.2.1.2.1 BRCS Feature Group Report Detail ............................................................................................................6-366.5.2.1.3 BRCS Feature Group Usage Report ....................................................................................................................6-36

6.5.2.1.3.1 BRCS Feature Group Usage Report Detail..................................................................................................6-366.5.2.1.4 Call Pickup Group Report ...................................................................................................................................6-37

6.5.2.1.4.1 Call Pickup Group Report Detail.................................................................................................................6-376.5.2.1.5 Configuration Group Report................................................................................................................................6-37

6.5.2.1.5.1 Configuration Group Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-376.5.2.1.6 Hunt Group Report..............................................................................................................................................6-38



ix

6.5.2.1.6.1 Hunt Group Report Detail ...........................................................................................................................6-386.5.2.1.7 Intercom Group Report .......................................................................................................................................6-38

6.5.2.1.7.1 Intercom Group Report Detail .....................................................................................................................6-386.5.2.1.8 Series Completion Report....................................................................................................................................6-39

6.5.2.1.8.1 Series Completion Report Detail...........................................................................................................6-396.5.2.1.9 Speed Calling Group Report ...............................................................................................................................6-39

6.5.2.1.9.1 Speed Calling Group Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-396.5.2.2 Group Reports - DMS Switch Type ...........................................................................................................................6-40

6.5.2.2.1 Authorization Group Report................................................................................................................................6-406.5.2.2.1.1 Authorization Group Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-40

6.5.2.2.2 Call Pickup Group Report ...................................................................................................................................6-406.5.2.2.2.1 Call Pickup Group Report Detail.................................................................................................................6-40

6.5.2.2.3 Group Intercom Report .......................................................................................................................................6-416.5.2.2.3.1 Group Intercom Report Detail .....................................................................................................................6-41

6.5.2.2.4 Hunt Group Report..............................................................................................................................................6-416.5.2.2.4.1 Hunt Group Report ......................................................................................................................................6-42

6.5.2.2.5 MADN Group Report..........................................................................................................................................6-426.5.2.2.5.1 Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group Report Detail ....................................................................6-43

6.5.2.2.6 Speed Call Group Report.....................................................................................................................................6-436.5.2.2.6.1 Speed Call Group Report.............................................................................................................................6-44

6.5.2.3 Group Reports – CS2K Switch Type .........................................................................................................................6-446.5.2.3.1 Authorization Group Report................................................................................................................................6-44

6.5.2.3.1.1 Authorization Group Report Detail .............................................................................................................6-446.5.2.3.2 Call Pickup Group Report ...................................................................................................................................6-44

6.5.2.3.2.1 Call Pickup Group Report Detail.................................................................................................................6-456.5.2.3.3 Group Intercom Report .......................................................................................................................................6-45

6.5.2.3.3.1 Group Intercom Report Detail .....................................................................................................................6-456.5.2.3.4 Hunt Group Report..............................................................................................................................................6-45

6.5.2.3.4.1 Hunt Group Report ......................................................................................................................................6-466.5.2.3.5 MADN Group Report..........................................................................................................................................6-47

6.5.2.3.5.1 Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group Report Detail ....................................................................6-476.5.2.3.6 Speed Call Group Report.....................................................................................................................................6-48

6.5.2.3.6.1 Speed Call Group Report.............................................................................................................................6-486.5.2.4 EWSD Group Reports................................................................................................................................................6-48

6.5.2.4.1 Authorization Group Report................................................................................................................................6-486.5.2.4.2 Call Pickup Group Report ...................................................................................................................................6-496.5.2.4.3 Feature Key Management Profile Report ............................................................................................................6-496.5.2.4.4 Series Completion Report....................................................................................................................................6-506.5.2.4.5 Speed Calling Group Report ...............................................................................................................................6-50

6.5.3 Order Report Examples ...............................................................................................................................6-516.5.3.1 Available Directory Number Report ..........................................................................................................................6-516.5.3.2 Detailed Order Report ................................................................................................................................................6-516.5.3.3 Failed Order Station Report .......................................................................................................................................6-526.5.3.4 Order Processing Summary Report ............................................................................................................................6-536.5.3.5 Pending Swap Report.................................................................................................................................................6-546.5.3.6 Performance Report ...................................................................................................................................................6-54

6.5.3.6.1.1 Performance Report Detail ..........................................................................................................................6-566.5.3.7 Planned Station Changes Report ................................................................................................................................6-57

6.5.3.7.1.1 Planned Station Changes Report Detail .......................................................................................................6-576.5.3.8 Processed Swap Report ..............................................................................................................................................6-57

6.5.3.8.1.1 Processed Swap Report Detail .....................................................................................................................6-586.5.3.9 Station Processing Report ..........................................................................................................................................6-58

6.5.3.9.1.1 Station Processing Report Detail .................................................................................................................6-59

7 Appendix – 5ESS Station Features List .....................................................7-1

8 Appendix – DMS100 Station Features List ................................................8-1

9 Appendix – CS2000 Station Features List .................................................9-1



x

10 Appendix – EWSD Station Features List..................................................10-1

11 Appendix – CS1K Station Features List ...................................................11-111.1 BASIC FEATURES..................................................................................................................................................11-111.2 COMPLEX FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................11-1



1-1


1 About This Guide1.1 Purpose

This user guide will help you learn the C3C® Provisioning application. Both experienced and inexperiencedusers can use the guide. New users may want to read the entire manual, while experienced users may just need toreference a specific section of functionality using the Table of Contents.

1.2 OrganizationThis user guide is divided into the following sections:

Section 1 About this GuideDescribes the purpose of this guide, details its organization, and provides an overview of C3C®Provisioning.

Section 2 IntroductionProvides an overview of the Provisioning features, the user interface, and its Window's look and feel.

Section 3 Getting StartedExplains the procedures for logging into and exiting the system.

Section 4 The C3C® WorkspaceDescribes the components of the C3C® desktop.

Section 5 ProvisioningIntroduces the windows and procedures for working with Stations and Orders.

Section 6 ReportsPresents the available reports and how to select filtering and sorting options.

Section 7-11 AppendixesProvides a list of supported station features with their descriptions.

1.3 Conventions Used in the GuideIcon, keyboard, field, window, tab, button, menu, and option names are in bold. Steps in the task-basedprocedures are in bold and numbered. Screen prints related to the step follow the step. When a reference is madeto another section within the guide, that reference will be in italic.



2-1

2 Introduction2.1 Overview

Welcome to the modular telecommunications solution designed to enhance a service provider’s Centrex offering.C3C® provides secure, partitioned data access and station provisioning that allows Centrex management activityto be performed flexibly by the service provider or directly by the Centrex customer.

The Provisioning Module is a state-of-the-art tool for provisioning stations on Next Generation and traditionalClass 5 central office switches. Like the other modules of C3C, Provisioning helps increase productivity with its:

Intuitive InterfaceC3C’s Provisioning module features a user-friendly graphical interface that enables you to manage stationswithout memorizing complex switch commands or feature abbreviations. Simply click on a phone set key, thenhighlight the feature you want to assign it. Provisioning tells you if the features on the set are compatible beforeyou submit changes to the switch.

Station ExplorerUsing C3C's Station Explorer, you can group stations by geographic location, by department, or however youdesire. The stations are displayed in easy-to-organize folders. If you are familiar with Windows PCs or Macintoshcomputers, you’ll feel comfortable with C3C®.

Multi-Station OrdersC3C® Station Administration lets you create orders against any number of stations, thereby letting youschedule moves, adds, and changes for an entire provisioning project under a single order. Provisioningmodule of the C3C® application.

The provisioning module within the Communications Control Center for Centrex Management (C3C®) is a

TemplatesTemplates let you set up standard station configurations that can be used repeatedly. For example, if you alwayswant to provision a prescribed set of features to a given type of telephone service subscriber, you can create atemplate with that predefined set of features. Once created, the template can be used as a “starter” configurationfor activating service on any number of stations in any number of orders. C3C® also lets you create new stationsby copying existing stations simply by pointing and clicking.

2.2 The User InterfaceC3C® Provisioning uses the Windows look and feel for its user interface. By employing commonnavigation and manipulation techniques, C3C® should help you become familiar with the program faster.

2.2.1 Windows Look and FeelWindows is a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which means you can work with your computer by clicking buttonsand dragging icons, and understand how the computer works by viewing its graphical display. This is easier thanmemorizing command lines, as in Microsoft DOS™ applications. Windows displays rectangular areas on thescreen in a document or an application. Because C3C® Provisioning works under the Windows environment,you can switch between the C3C® Workspace and another application’s window. Once you’ve learned how towork with menus and buttons in one Windows application, you can use that knowledge in C3C® Provisioning.This documentation assumes you have some familiarity with Microsoft Windows ®. The following tips cover afew basic principles. Please see your Microsoft Windows user guide or online help for more detailed instructionsand documentation.

2.2.1.1 Using the MouseIn Windows applications, use the mouse to maneuver the pointer around the application.

Point Move the pointer to a specified place on your screen.



2-2

Click Press and release your mouse button.

Drag Hold down your mouse button, move the mouse while holding button down, thenrelease the mouse button.

Double-click Press and release your mouse button twice in rapid succession.

The primary mouse button is the left button on a two-button mouse. If you are left-handed, you canswitch the buttons in the Windows Control Panel and move the mouse to the left side of the workstation.

The mouse pointer display depends on where it is in the window.

The standard pointer is an arrow pointing up and slightly to the left.

When you move the pointer close to the edge of a moveable window or column, it changes to atwo-headed arrow.

A blinking I-beam indicates you’ve entered a text area where typing is appropriate.

An hourglass denotes that the program is busy.

2.2.1.2 Using Keyboard ShortcutsMost menu names or commands in Windows contain keyboard shortcuts. The majority of menu items in C3C®Provisioning also provide these shortcuts. Use the shortcuts by pressing the ALT key plus the underlinedcharacter of the menu name or command at the same time. For example, you can activate the File menu bypressing ALT+F. Many of the menu options contain other keyboard shortcuts. Once the drop-down menu hasbeen activated, the keyboard shortcut is the underlined letter of each option. For example, once you’ve activatedthe File menu, you may exit C3C® Provisioning by pressing X. You can also use your directional arrows, (↑ and↓ ), to move to the Exit option. By holding down the Alt+Tab key, you can move from C3C® Workspace to anyrunning Windows application. For additional shortcut key information, type “Keyboard Shortcuts” in yourWindows help Index.

2.2.1.3 Graphical User Interface NotesWindows XP and Windows 2000 users may encounter graphics rendering problems when modifying theConnection Details of a newly added station. When you add data into a Value, sometimes the Property of theValue will disappear while clicking on it. When you select a property, the highlight and the background colors arethe same the GUI, so it appears that the property has "disappeared". To remedy this problem, right click on theDesktop, choose Properties, click on the Appearance tab, and set the color scheme back to Windows Standard.



3-1

3 Getting Started3.1 Logging In

To log into C3C®, you must provide a valid User ID and password. If you don't have a User ID or you'veforgotten your password, contact your C3C® system administrator.

To log in:

Enter your User ID in the User ID field.

Enter your password in the Password field.

Press Enter, or click the Login button.

Note: The User ID and password are case sensitive.After the system verifies the information you entered, the C3C® Workspace will display. The workspace tool barhas buttons for launching each module been assigned to your Profile. Profiles are maintained by the user(s) withSystem Administration access.

3.1.1 ButtonsButton Description

After entering your User ID and Password, click to start C3C®.

Click to exit C3C® logon without starting C3C®.

Click to open Settings window for entering Proxy information. For more information, see Settings.



3-2

3.1.1.1 SettingsSome C3C® users access the C3C® Server via an Internet connection, and some of these PCs may reside behind acompany firewall prohibiting direct secure (SSL) access to the Internet. Such firewalls are often configured with aspecial mediator program called an "SSL proxy". The SSL proxy is a medium allowing communication betweenthe user's PC on the internal network and the secure server on the Internet. For C3C® to communicate through theSSL proxy, it must be configured in the Settings window. Contact the local system administrator for the PC toobtain the correct values for these settings.

NOTE: The settings in this window are only needed if you reside behind an SSL proxy. Settings only need to be enteredthe first time you access C3C®. Subsequent access only requires your User ID and Password.

SSL Proxy Host: If your PC requires an SSL proxy to access the Internet, set the SSL Proxy Host field to the(DNS) name or port of the proxy.

SSL Proxy Port: Set the SSL Proxy Port to the port on which the proxy listens for connections. This port isusually 443, and will be used if the SSL Proxy Port is left unspecified.

3.2 Logging OutClick the X in the upper right corner of the Workspace window or click File then Exit from theWorkspace menu bar to log out of C3C®. For further information, see Workspace Components.

3.3 On-Line HelpOpen On-line help by clicking the Help menu (located on the Workspace menu bar), then the C3C® Helpmenu listing. For further information, see Help.

Help displays in Acrobat PDF format. Depending on how your workstation is configured, the On-line help mayopen in your Internet Browser program, or in an independent Acrobat Reader window. Both methods size the helpand C3C® workspace windows to allow simultaneous viewing, or you can press the ALT-TAB key combinationto switch between the two windows.

3.4 Changing Your PasswordDepending on how your user profile is set up by your C3C® system administrator, you may have access to theChange Password window. Access it from C3C's Tools menu !Administration! Change Password.

If the Administration listing or the Change Password sub-listing do not display in your Tools menu, then yourprofile requires you to contact your C3C® system Administrator for password changes.

3.4.1 Change Password windowAccess this window from C3C's Tools menu and change your password. You must know the current passwordbefore you can assign a new one.



3-3

User ID: This field is populated with the User ID that is logged in. It cannot be edited.

Current Password: Type the current password in this field. This field is case sensitive.

New Password: Type the new password in this field. This field is case sensitive.

Confirm Password: Re-type the new password in this case-sensitive field to protect against typing errors.

After entering the current and new passwords, click this button to save your changes. Your next login will require the new password.

Clicking this button cancels any edits and closes the Password Change window.



4-1

4 The C3C® WorkspaceThe C3C® Workspace displays after you log into C3C®. You can access modules available to your User ID.Multiple modules can run simultaneously in the workspace. You can run the Report Browser module to obtain alist of stations, then open the Station Explorer for the listed stations to edit. The workspace, a “session” ofcommunication with C3C®, can host multiple sessions simultaneously. If you are a service provider, you can login, then, in a separate session, log in as a customer, thereby emulating the customer and viewing the informationavailable to them. All workspaces can be minimized or adjusted for simultaneous viewing. All modules opened ina workspace remain in their parent workspace windows.

4.1 Workspace Components

4.1.1 Title Bar

The workspace title bar is located at the top of the workspace window, and displays the name of the current user.The standard Windows control buttons on right edge can minimize, maximize or close/exit C3C® Provisioning.

4.1.2 Menu Bar

Below the title bar is the menu bar. The following menu items are available to all users.



4-2

4.1.2.1 File

Close The Close command closes the function window currently activated. It does not close the C3C® program.If no function windows are open or active, this command will be grayed out.

Exit The Exit command will close the C3C® program. Any open function windows will be closed.4.1.2.2 Tools

The Tools menu provides shortcuts to some function windows, and sometimes has the only access to a window.

NOTE: The listings within this menu and its sub-menus are subject to the limitations of your user profile.

Each main listing in the Tool menu offers a sub-menufrom which you can open a function window. Hoveryour cursor over a main listing to see its submenu. Clicka sub-menu listing to open the function window.

Item Additional Access FromOrder Browser Workspace Tool bar

Order Editor Order Browser, Station Editor

Station Explorer Workspace Toolbar, Order Editor

Auth Code Manager None

Group Explorer Workspace Tool bar

4.1.2.3 Window

This menu lists any open function window. By clicking on a listing, that window will automatically become theactive, or focused, window. This menu is blank if you do not have any opened windows.



4-3

4.1.2.4 Help

C3C® Help Clicking this command will launch the On-line help.About C3C Clicking this command displays version number and related information for C3C® Provisioning.This information is helpful if you contact support for assistance.

4.1.3 Tool Bar

The Tool Bar, located just below the Menu Bar, displays buttons for each function window to whichyou have access. Clicking a button opens the corresponding function window. The Find tool is alsolocated here. It can be used to find a specific station or order. The buttons within this Tool Bar aresubject to the limitations of your user profile.

4.1.4 Auth Code ManagerThe Auth Code Manager is accessed from the Tools menu on the C3C® Workspace. It is listed as a sub-menu item on the Station Admin listing.

This tool lets you add/delete Authorization Codes to/from Auth Code Groups imported from the switch.Auth Code Groups are imported using the 5ESS Auth Code Synchronization job, the DMS100 Auth CodeSynchronization job, or the EWSD Auth Code Synchronization job in the C3C® System Scheduler(accessed from the Administration Module). The Auth Code Manager window finds, deletes, or createsAuth Code Group pairings, while the Auth Code Details window views and/or edits details of a pairing.

Switch: Populated from its drop-down list. Customer type users can view switches previously associated with acustomer. Service Provider type users will see all switches. The selection will fill the Auth Group drop-down list.Auth Group/Centrex Group: This fields function changes depending on the switch type being configured. TheAuth Group drop-down list is not populated until a selection is made in the Switch field.



4-4

5ESS and DMS: This field is populated from its drop-down list which list shows Auth Code Groupspreviously imported for the switch displayed in the Switch field. Auth Code Groups, and the featuresincluded in them, are configured external to C3C® on the switch itself.EWSD: This field is populated from its drop-down list, which displays Centrex Groups previouslyimported for the switch displayed in the Switch field.

Auth Code: Enter the Code that you want to find or create.Button Description

Searches for the Code to Auth Group pair for the selected switch. Requires selectionsin the Switch and Auth Group fields and an entry in the Code field. If a match isfound, Auth Code Details window opens, displaying details for the indicated pairing.Opens the Auth Code Details window. Enter a Code and code details for the newpairing. This button requires selections in the Switch and Auth Group fields.

Closes the Auth Code Manager window.

4.1.4.1 5ESS Auth Code DetailsClicking the Find or New button on the Auth Code Manager accesses 5ESS Auth Code Details. TheDetails window displayed depends on the type of switch populated on the Auth Code Manager. If a5ESS Switch is selected, details for 5ESS auth codes will be displayed.

Auth Code Details lets you edit the Description or Class of Service fields (MFCOS, AFCOS) forexisting 5ESS Code to Auth Group pairs. For new pairs you can also edit the Code field.Code: When working with the result of a Find, this field is populated from the entry in the Auth Code Managerwindow. It cannot be edited. When accessed (click New), this window is populated with any entry made on theManager (blank if you made no entry). Edit this field when creating a new Code to Group pair.Description: Lets you record up to a fifty-character text message associated with the Code to Auth Group pair.You can edit this field for new or existing pairs. This field is optional.MFCOS: When Auth Code Groups are defined on the switch, the switch tech has the option of building FeatureClass of Service subsets of the group. Example: The Group has twenty features listed, but Class of Service number01 only includes five of those features. If a Code is added to the group and no Class of Service is selected, the userof that code will have to enter the code to use any of the twenty features. If Class of Service number 01 is selected,the user will only have to enter a code when using any of the five features listed in number 01. The MFCOS field(Main Feature Class of Service) is populated from its drop-down list. Selecting from this field limits the number offeatures that require a Code to the features included in the selected Class of Service number. Class of Servicenumbers, and the features included, are set up outside of C3C® on the switch itself. This field is optional.AFCOS: The AFCOS field (Alternate Feature Class of Service) is populated from its drop-down list. Selectingfrom this field limits the number of features that require a Code for the features included in the selected Class ofService number for AFCOS and the selected Class of Service for MCOS. A selection is required in MFCOS beforea selection can be made in AFCOS. A selection in this field is optional.

4.1.4.2 DMS100 / CS2KAuth Code DetailsClick the Find or New buttons on the Auth Code Manager to access DMS100 Auth Code Details. The Detailswindow depends on the switch type selected on the Auth Code Manager. If a DMS100 Switch is selected, detailsfor DMS100 auth codes display. In Auth Code Details, you can edit the Description or other details for DMS100Code to Auth Group pairs. For new pairs, you can also edit the Code field.



4-5

Auth Code: When working with the result of a Find, this field is populated from the entry made in the AuthCode Manager window. This code is limited to four characters. It cannot be edited. When this window isaccessed (clicking New), it is populated from any entry on the Manager (including a blank). Edit this field whencreating a new Code to Group pair.Description: Lets you record up to a fifty-character text message associated with the Code to Auth Group pair.You can edit this field for new or existing pairs. This field is optional.Format: Required. Decide from the drop-down list if the system can use the auth code assigned to the customergroup. If IBN is chosen, the auth code is usable. If EXEMPT is chosen, the auth code is unusable.Type: Required. Select type of auth code from a drop-down list. Values for the field include ASR (automatic setrelocation), SSAC (station specific auth code), SUPAC (super auth code), and SW (system wide auth code)..NCOS: Indicate the Network Class of Service (NCOS) associated with the auth code. It gives the auth code userthe ability to raise or lower the NCOS dialing permissions, as compared to the NCOS associated with the station.Use Account Code: Indicates whether or not an account code is necessary when using the auth code.Security Code: Specify up to four digits for the security code. You must use an IBN Format.

4.1.4.3 EWSD Auth Code DetailsClick the Find or New button to access EWSD Auth Code Details on the Auth Code Manager. The Detailswindow depends on the type of switch populated on the Auth Code Manager. If an EWSD Switch is selected,details for EWSD auth codes will display. In Auth Code Details, edit the Description or FRL for EWSD Code toAuth Group pairs. For new pairs, you can also edit the Code field.

Code: When working with the result of a Find, this field is populated from the entry made in the Auth CodeManager window. It cannot be edited. When this window is accessed (click New), it is populated from any entryon the Manager (including a blank). Edit when creating a new Code to Group pair.Description: Record up to a one hundred-character text message associated with the Code to Auth Group pair.You can edit this field for new or existing pairs. This field is optional.



4-6

FRL: Specify the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) associated with the Code to Auth Group pair.

4.1.4.4 Auth Code Bulk Procesing

Auth Code Bulk processing is a Wizard that allows the customer to add, edit, or delete a range of authcodes ratherthan individual auth codes. From the Auth Code Manager, choose a Switch and an Auth Group, and click

to open the Wizard.

Choose from the available options and click . All options lead to the following screen.



4-7

Enter a valid range in the format described and click .



4-8

The type of switch you chose in the Auth Code Manager dialog box determines the auth codeformat and the data entered in this box. See earlier sections (4.1.4.1 – 4.1.4.3) for descriptions anddefinitons of the data.

Click to save your changes and close the wizard. Click to discardyour changes and close the wizard.

Note: If you choose to Delete Authcodes, clicking after entering the range of authcodes that you want to delete will begin the process of deleting those auth codes. Unlike the otheroptions, this option does not open a dialog box that allows data to be entered.

4.1.5 Find ToolUse C3C's Find Tool to locate a single Station or Order quickly. The Find Tool is located on the upper-right sideof the C3C® main Workspace toolbar.

4.1.5.1 Finding a Station with the Find ToolThe default function is for finding Stations, searching by a Station's Directory Number (DN).

Using the Station Find Tool

Click in the field next to the Find button. Type in the Directory number for the Station you want to find. The Find Tooluses standard Windows wildcards for station searches. You can enter a partial DN followed by an asterisk (*), and FastFind will return a list of all stations matching the portion of the DN you typed.

Click . If your entry from step 2 returns a single match, the Station Editor opens, loaded with the stationyou indicated. If your entry from step 2 returns multiple matches, the Select a Station dialog box appears, listing thematches.

Click on the station match to open, then click OK.

4.1.5.2 Finding an Order with the Find ToolThe default function is for Stations, searching by a Station's Directory Number (DN).

Using the Order Find ToolClick the drop-down arrow next to the default find listing of Station by DN.Click the Order by Order ID listing. Enter the Order ID to edit. The Find Tool does not have wildcards for Orders.Enter the entire Order ID. Finalized Orders are not included in this tool's searches.

Click Find. If match is found, Order Editor opens with Order you indicated.



5-1

5 Provisioning5.1 About Provisioning

Station Provisioning, often called “move-add-change,” comprises all of the activities necessary to establish,maintain, and disconnect telephone service. For each subscriber station, you can add, change, or deleteinformation related to the station. This information includes basic station data, station number assignment, lineport assignment, and features along with appropriate feature parameters.

• Work order processing with automatic update of DMS-100, 5ESS, and EWSD switches on near real-timebasis

• Error reporting and purging of work orders• Generation of an interface file which can update downstream Operational Support Systems (OSS)

5.2 Provisioning Method OptionsC3C® features two primary methods for provisioning stations. The first provisions through Station Explorer, andultimately, the Station Editor. It is usually used to create or maintain a single station, and produces immediateresults. The Station Explorer provides a "real time" view of stations currently configured on the switch. Thesecond method provisions stations through the Order Browser and Order Editor, and is used for complexprovisioning orders, or for orders that must be planned in advance. The Order Editor provisions multi-stationorders for automatic execution on user-specified dates. The Order Browser is a "planned" view of how stationswill be configured once an order is successfully processed. C3C® also provides a Group Explorer and GroupEditor, which manage station groups (MLHG, CPU, MDN, etc). When working with groups, Group Editor ismore convenient than the Station Editor. When provisioning a station through Station Editor, you are creatingan order. This "Default Order" can be created, accessed, or edited through the Order Browser and Order Editor.

5.3 Station ExplorerThe Station Explorer is the central access point for Stations and Station Folders. Stations are housed withinStation Folders. All customers have a default main folder labeled with their name. You can add stations directly tothat main folder, or create sub-folders and add stations to them. You can “drag & drop” stations between foldersif they remain within the hierarchy of their original main folder. Sub-folders can moved in this manner as well.Users will only have access to stations in their assigned folder(s).

5.3.1 Tool Button BarButton Description

New Folder (active when folder is selected): Creates a new sub-folder as a child to the selected folder.

Edit Folder (active when sub-folder is selected): Click name of selected sub-folder, and type in a newone.Delete Folder (active when sub-folder is selected): Delete a selected sub-folder (cannot containstations).Edit Station (active when station is selected): Opens the Station Editor loaded with selection fromDisplay Panel.



5-2

Button Description

New Station (always active): Launches the New Station pop-up, followed by the Station Editor.

Copy Station (active when station is selected): If single station is selected, opens Station Editor with acopy of station selected from Display Panel, creating a new station based on the elements of the selectedstation. If multiple stations are selected, opens the Order Editor with multiple stations based on theelements of the selected station from the Station Explorer.Disconnect Station (active when active station selected): Launches the Station Editor loaded with theselected station.Line Verify (active when active station selected): Reviews the selected station and updates C3C® withchanges found on the switch.Refresh View (always active): Refreshes the Station Explorer's Selection Panel and Display Panel,with any entries that have been made by other users after you opened the Explorer.

5.3.2 Selection PanelThe Selection panel offers two tabs for accessing stations. The Station Finder tab lets you query with filters. TheStation Folders tab provides a Windows Explorer-type view.

5.3.2.1 Station Finder TabThe Station Finder tab opens with Station Explorer, and searches for stations without browsing through folders.Use fields individually or combined to initiate a search. For example, search for all stations on "Switch A" forCustomer “Tutone Industries” by selecting "Switch A" from the Switch field drop-down list, and selecting "TutoneIndustries" from the Customer drop-down list, then clicking Find.

Switch - Limits find results to stations that are located on the selected switch. (required for Advanced Query)Folder - Narrow a search to the stations housed within a specific sub-folder. A selection is first required in the Customerfield. The available selections in this field are limited to sub-folders belonging to that customer.DN- Use this field to search for stations by directory number. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".Station ID - Search for stations by typing in the Station ID with or without the version number (1234 -1 or 1234).Include Secondary DN - Search by including stations with a Secondary DN that match your entry in the DN field.OE - Limits the search to stations communicating through the LEN you enter. You may use wildcards "?" and "*". Aselection is first required in the Switch field.Service Provider - Limits find results to stations belonging to the selected service provider.Customer - Limits find results to stations belonging to the selected customer. (required for Advanced Query)Description - Search for stations by the test entered on their Description field. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".

Button DescriptionEnter or select all of the search criteria to include, and click to initiate the search. If the Advancedbutton displays the Active Query icon, , the advanced query will be included in the search. The buttondoes not activate until you enter input in one of the criteria fields.

Clear all selections or entries from the Finder tab and Advanced Query by clicking this button.

Opens the Advanced Query window for Group and Feature searches. Selections in the Customer andSwitch fields are required before this button is active. When an Advanced Query has been built, theActive Query icon, , displays on the button.



5-3

5.3.2.2 Advanced QueryAdvanced Query lets you further narrow the search compared to the criteria available on the Station ExplorerFinder tab. Line types, Model, and Features, and their prompt values, can be added to any query. Click Add toQuery to produce the aforementioned list on the Search Items display panel. When querying a 5E switch, aBRCS Feature Group, a Configuration Group, or a Multiline Hunt Group can be added to the query. All selectionsin the Advanced Query window can be added as an “AND,” “OR,” “AND NOT,” or “OR NOT.” For example: Ifyou select the CFG001 Configuration Group, “AND”, and the Feature /ARC, the query will only return matcheson stations that have both Configuration Group CFG001 and Feature /ARC. You can also search by whether astation is Swap Enabled and/or Modifiable. For example, checking Yes and No on Swap Enabled searches forall stations that are AND are not swap enabled, but checking just Yes on Modifiable searches only for stations thatARE modifiable. The qualifications set on these two items are in addition to the parameters chosen for other itemsin the query.



5-4

5.3.2.2.1 Station Attributes Select PanelThis panel selects the attributes that apply to the station. If an EWSD type switch has been selected, the only drop-down lists on the Station Attributes panel are Type and Model. For a DMS switch, there are Type, Model, andLT Class drop-down lists.

BFG: Add a BRCS Feature Group (BFG) to a query to limit find results to stations with selected BFG. The dropdown list shows BFGs associated with Customer/Switch selections from the Station Finder tab, which are notapplied until clicking Add Query button. It only appears when querying a 5ESS switch.Config Group: Add a Configuration Group to a query to limit results to stations with selected ConfigurationGroup. The drop down list shows Config Groups associated with Customer/Switch selections from Station Findertab, which are not applied until clicking Add Query button. It only appears when querying a 5ESS switch.MLHG: Add a Multiline Hunt Group (MLHG) to a query to limit results to stations with selected MLHG. Thedrop down list shows MLHGs associated with Customer/Switch selections from Station Finder tab, which are notapplied until clicking Add Query button. It only appears when querying a 5ESS switch.Type: Add a Type to a query to limit results to stations with selected line type. The drop down list shows LineTypes associated with Customer/Switch selections from Station Finder tab, which are not applied until clickingAdd Query button. This selection appears for all switch types.Model: Adding a Model to a query limits the find results to stations having the selected Model. The drop down listshows Models associated with the Customer/Switch selections made on the Station Finder tab. Selections are notapplied to the query until the Add Query button is clicked. This selection appears for all switch types.LT Class: Populated during DMS-100 Switch Synchronization and cannot be edited. Values are only displayedfor ISDN station types. Logical terminal class (LTCLASS) classifies each ISDN station based on the type ofmessaging exchanged between the station and circuit switch part of the switch. The LTCLASS can have one ofthree values: BRACS for stimulus terminals, BRAMFT for MFT terminals, or BRAFS for functional terminals.

5.3.2.2.2 Station Features Select panel



5-5

This panel selects features and their prompt values. You can specify multiple features to the query, a singleprompt value for each, and the operator that will be used in the query.

And/Or/Not: Define how your feature will be inserted into the query. The drop down list for this field shows:AND, OR, AND NOT and OR NOT. The default is AND. For a given query, only one operator may be used.Feature: Adding a Feature to a query limits the find results to those stations having the selected Feature. The dropdown list for this field shows Features associated with, and approved for, the Customer/Switch selections made onthe Station Finder tab. Selections are not applied to the query until the Add Query button is clicked. Once afeature has been inserted (with or without prompt values) you can select a different feature and insert it in thequery (with or without prompt values).Prompt: Becomes active after selecting from the Feature field. The drop-down panel only shows prompts for thefeature selected in the Feature field. After making a prompt selection, the Value field activates. C3C® allows oneprompt selection per feature, but you can specify a feature multiple times to retrieve more than one feature prompt.Value: Activates after selecting from the Prompt field. If the value for the selection is a known set, the field willbecome a drop-down list with available choices. If the value for the selection requires a text entry, then the fieldwill accept your entry. C3C® allows one value entry/selection for the selection you made in the Prompt field.Selections are not applied to the query until the Add Query button is clicked.

5.3.2.2.3 Query panelThe Query panel displays currently applied elements of the query. The top part of the panel shows all theelements from the Finder tab. Below this are selections from the Station Attributes Select panel, along withselections and/or entries from the Station Features Select panel. Each query element (Finder tab, StationAttributes Select, and Station Features Select) is separated by the operator marker.

5.3.2.2.4 Buttons

Button DescriptionUpdates selections made in the Station Attributes Select panel to the Query display.Inserts the selections made in the Station Features Select panel to the Query display.

Removes the selected query element from the Query display.

Clears the Query display of all entries except those from the Finder tab.

After entering or selecting all of the search criteria, click to initiate the search.

Closes Advanced Query window and readies the Finder tab's Find button to invoke the query.

Closes the Advanced Query window, discarding any current query.

5.3.2.3 Station Folders TabA main folder exists for each customer added to both your system and your access level. If sub-folders exist withina folder, a plus sign is displayed in front of the folder. Click the plus sign to expand the main folder to displayany sub folders. Sub-folders can also have sub-level folders. Sub-folders can be created, edited, or deleted. Beforedeleting a sub-folder, it must be empty of stations. Stations can be housed in main folders and/or sub-folders. Tosee the stations within a folder, click on the folder and the stations will show in the Display Panel to the right. AService Provider drop-down list limits the displayed folders. If a Service Provider is selected, only the folders forcustomers assigned to the selected Service Provider display. If the Service Provider is blank, all customer foldersdisplay. The Service Provider field is pre-populated for Service Provider and Customer type users, and cannot beedited.



5-6

5.3.3 Display PanelThe Display Panel lists the stations resulting from the choices you made in the Selection Panel. Thisholds true for both the Station Folders tab and the Station Finder tab.

Each station is represented by a row. There are five columns of information for each row:First Column: Displays status of station. Do not include pending stations in multiple station selections.

A – Active: Station is active with no pending orders.P – Pending: Station has a pending order against it.

Station ID: The Station ID is displayed. The number after the dash is the version number for that station.Dir. Number: If the Display Panel is populated from the Station Finder, and you have selected the SecondaryDN check-box, this column shows the Secondary Directory number. Otherwise, it defaults to the Primary DN.OE: This column displays the Office Equipment number for the station.Description: Displays the description assigned to the station from within the Station Editor.

5.3.4 Organizing Stations in FoldersA station folder is a collection of stations. C3C's Station Administration uses folders ( ) to represent stationgroups. A station folder can contain sub-folders as well as individual stations. To view the sub-folders within aparent folder, expand by clicking the icon in front of it. When you expand a station folder, the sub-folders itcontains appear below, slightly indented. To view the stations within a folder, open by clicking the folder. Theindividual stations contained in the folder appear in the Display Panel, to the right of the Selection Panel.

5.4 Station Editor



5-7

Views and edits stations. Accessed from Station Explorer or Order Editor. Appearance depends on switch typeassociated with station being edited. Details available in General Tab and Features Tab sections of this manual.

5.4.1 Title BarThe title bar shows the station you are editing. When creating a new station, the title bar displays "new". Whenediting a station, the title bar displays the LEN/OE number and/or primary DN (directory number).

5.4.2 Tool Button Bar

Saves your entries to the currently displayed station.

Submits your entries for immediate processing on the switch.

Schedules orders to be submitted for processing

Opens the Order Editor. The window displays the order in which the current station editsreside. From the Order Editor, schedule the order for processing.



5-8

The user can override the scheduled time for execution of an order directly from the StationEditor in order to execute it immediately.

Station changes (take place through Orders) made from the Station Editor automatically create a “default order”.5.4.3 General Tab (Station on DMS Switch)

Assign a user defined description for the station and its location, and enter the Line Equipment Number (LEN)and the Folder in which you want the station to reside.

5.4.3.1 Input PanelIf editing a station, all supplied inputs display. If creating a new station, most fields will be blank. If creating astation from a template, fields populated in the template will be pre-populated accordingly.

Note: If a DMS-100 / CS2000 switch has Residential Enhanced Services (RES) SO Simplification enabled, aRES type of Line Class Code (LCC) is supported. A 1FR station automatically gets residential enhanced servicesapplied. When creating a new RES station, there are no CUSTGRP, SUBGROUP, or NCOS prompts for thedirectory number (DN) feature. While a 1FR LCC is used to create the station, the RES LCC is returned from theswitch for the station during a line verify or switch synchronization.

Description: Required. Accepts keyboard input. The name assigned to the station is used most often.Location: Optional. Accepts keyboard input. Examples include geographical location, room, or cubicle numbersBillable Telephone Number: The number that will be billed. If the BTN is not provided, it will default to theprimary directory number of the station.Customer: The name of the organization to which the station is assigned. A Customer is required for new stations.Folder: Populated from its drop-down list which shows any Station Folders previously created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. For further information on Station Folders see Organizing Stations in Folders.Switch: The station being edited resides on the selected switch. The switch must have been created for thecustomer displayed in the Customer field. A Switch is required for new stations.OE: (Required) Office Equipment number. On a DMS-100 switch, enter or edit the line equipment number (LEN).



5-9

LTID: Populated during DMS-100 Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. Values are displayed only forISDN station types. Each ISDN station is allocated a unique alphanumeric identifier, Logical Terminal Identifier(LTID). This LTID is the key to the terminal service profile associated with each ISDN station.LTCLASS: Populated during DMS-100 Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. Values are displayed onlyfor ISDN station types. Logical terminal class (LTCLASS) classifies each ISDN station based on the type ofmessaging exchanged between the station and circuit switch part of the switch. The LTCLASS can have one ofthree values: BRACS for stimulus terminals, BRAMFT for MFT terminals, or BRAFS for functional terminals.Active Date: Populated by the system and cannot be edited. Indicates the date and time that the station edit willoccur. When accessing the Station Editor from the Explorer, the Active Date field displays the time the Editorwas opened. Execution of the order will occur when the Execute button is clicked. When accessing the StationEditor from an order, the Active Date field will display the time that the parent order is scheduled for processing.Line Card Type: Populated during DMS-100 Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. When you create astation, the field will display: "Unavailable".

5.4.3.2 Checkbox Options Template - Click this check box if you want to save this station as a template rather than an actual station. Update Database Only - Click to update the C3C® system records and not the switch. This is useful when

fine-tuning the synchronization of new installations. Use this option sparingly, as it may cause a mismatchbetween the C3C® database and the switch. Do not use when editing directory information, location, etc.

Station can participate in SWAP - Click this check box if you want to Station can be modified - Click this check box if you want to

5.4.3.3 Message BoxesDisplays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When a switch erroroccurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violation message is too long todisplay in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visible portion of the message. Click and dragon the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/or adjust the pane size. Messages may result frominvalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab. 5.4.4 General Tab (From Disconnect) on a DMS / CS2K SwitchHighlight a station on a DMS / CS2K from the Station Explorer and click Disconnect from the top of the box. TheStation Editor appears, this time offering the Deletion Intercept option. Deletion Intercept is the treatment that the linereceives when the telephone number is taken out of service. For example, if you place a call to a number that has beendisconnected, the call can be routed to the operator, get a message, etc. depending on the option that is chosen. Choose thetreatment from the drop down list.



5-10

5.4.5 General Tab (Station on CS2K Switch)Assign a user defined description for the station and its location, and enter the Line Equipment Number (LEN)and the Folder in which you want the station to reside.



5-11

5.4.5.1 Input PanelIf editing a station, all supplied inputs display. If creating a new station, most fields will be blank. If creating astation from a template, fields populated in the template will be pre-populated accordingly.

Note: If a DMS-100 / CS2000 switch has Residential Enhanced Services (RES) SO Simplification enabled, aRES type of Line Class Code (LCC) is supported. A 1FR station automatically gets residential enhanced servicesapplied. When creating a new RES station, there are no CUSTGRP, SUBGROUP, or NCOS prompts for thedirectory number (DN) feature. While a 1FR LCC is used to create the station, the RES LCC is returned from theswitch for the station during a line verify or switch synchronization.

Description: Required. Accepts keyboard input. The name assigned to the station is used most often.Location: Optional. Accepts keyboard input. Examples include geographical location, room, or cubicle numbersBillable Telephone Number: The number that will be billed. If the BTN is not provided, it will default to theprimary directory number of the station.Customer: The name of the organization to which the station is assigned. A Customer is required for new stations.Folder: Populated from its drop-down list which shows any Station Folders previously created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. For further information on Station Folders see Organizing Stations in Folders.Switch: The station being edited resides on the selected switch. The switch must have been created for thecustomer displayed in the Customer field. A Switch is required for new stations.OE: (Required) Office Equipment number. On a CS2K switch, enter or edit the line equipment number (LEN).LTID: Populated during CS2K Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. Values are displayed only for ISDNstation types. Each ISDN station is allocated a unique alphanumeric identifier, Logical Terminal Identifier (LTID).This LTID is the key to the terminal service profile associated with each ISDN station.



5-12

LTCLASS: Populated during CS2K Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. Values are displayed only forISDN station types. Logical terminal class (LTCLASS) classifies each ISDN station based on the type ofmessaging exchanged between the station and circuit switch part of the switch. The LTCLASS can have one ofthree values: BRACS for stimulus terminals, BRAMFT for MFT terminals, or BRAFS for functional terminals.Active Date: Populated by the system and cannot be edited. Indicates the date and time that the station edit willoccur. When accessing the Station Editor from the Explorer, the Active Date field displays the time the Editorwas opened. Execution of the order will occur when the Execute button is clicked. When accessing the StationEditor from an order, the Active Date field will display the time that the parent order is scheduled for processing.Line Card Type: Populated during CS2K Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. When you create astation, the field will display: "Unavailable".

5.4.5.2 Checkbox Options Template - Click this check box if you want to save this station as a template rather than an actual station. Update Database Only - Click to update the C3C® system records and not the switch. This is useful when

fine-tuning the synchronization of new installations. Use this option sparingly, as it may cause a mismatchbetween the C3C® database and the switch. Do not use when editing directory information, location, etc.

Station can participate in SWAP - Click this check box if you want to

Station can be modified - Click this check box if you want to

5.4.5.3 Message BoxesDisplays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When aswitch error occurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violationmessage is too long to display in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visibleportion of the message. Click and drag on the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/oradjust the pane size. Messages may result from invalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab.

5.4.6 General Tab (Station on 5ESS Switch)Assign a description, including the Office Equipment (OE) and the Folder in which you want the stationto reside, to the station and its location.



5-13

5.4.6.1 Input PanelIf editing an existing station, all previous edits display. If creating a new station, most fields are blank. Ifcreating a station from a template, fields populated in the template will be pre-populated accordingly.

Description: Required. Accepts keyboard input. The name assigned to the station is used most often.Location: Optional. Accepts keyboard input. Examples include building, lab, room, or cubicle numbers.Billable Telephone Number: The number that will be billed. If the BTN is not provided, it will default to theprimary directory number of the station.Customer: The name of the organization to which the station is assigned. A Customer is required for new stations.This field is pre-populated in existing stations and cannot be edited.Folder: Populated from the drop-down list populated with Station Folders previously created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. The station being edited will reside in the selected folder. For further informationon Station Folders, see Organizing Stations in Folders.Switch: The station being edited will reside on the selected switch, which must have been created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. This field pre-populated and cannot be edited.OE: Office Equipment number (required). Enter or edit the Office Equipment (OE) number. When entering an OEfor a 5ESS station, start the number with a letter that indicates the OE type (A, G, E, or N).USPID: Populated by the system during 5ESS Switch Synchronization, and can only be edited during initialstation creation. Data is only valid for ISDN station types. The User Service Profile Identifier (USPID) is anumber that uniquely identifies the set of services in the user service order profile (USOP) for an ISDN station.Active Date: Populated by the system, this field indicates the date and time the station edit will occur. Whenaccessing the Station Editor from the Explorer, the Active Date field displays the time the Editor was opened.



5-14

Execution of the order occurs when the Execute button is clicked. When accessing the Station Editor from anorder, the Active Date field displays the time that the order will process.

5.4.6.2 Checkbox Panel Template Click this check box if you want to save this station as a template rather than an actual station. Update Database Only Click to update C3C® system records and not external equipment. This is useful when

fine-tuning the synchronization of new installations. Use this option sparingly, as it may cause the C3C® databaseto not match the external equipment. Do not use when making changes to directory information, location, etc.

Station can participate in SWAP - Click this check box if you want to Station can be modified - Click this check box if you want to


5.4.7 General Tab (Station on EWSD Switch)Describe the station and its location. Enter the Office Equipment (OE), and the folder in which the stationresides.



5-15

5.4.7.1 Input PanelIf editing a station, all previous edits display. If creating a new station, most fields are blank. If creating a stationfrom a template, fields populated in the template will be pre-populated accordingly.

Description: Required. Accepts keyboard input. The name assigned to the station is used most often.Location: Optional. Accepts keyboard input. Examples include building, lab, room, or cubicle numbers.Billable Telephone Number: The number that will be billed. If the BTN is not provided, it will default to theprimary directory number of the station.Customer: The name of the organization to which the station is assigned. A Customer is required fornew stations. This field is pre-populated in existing stations and cannot be edited.Folder: The drop-down list shows Station Folders created for customer in Customer field. The station beingedited resides in selected folder. For further information on Station Folders, see Organizing Stations in Folders.Switch: The station being edited will reside on the selected switch, which must have been created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. This field is pre-populated and cannot be edited.OE: Office Equipment number (required). Enter or edit the Office Equipment (OE) number. When entering anOE for a 5ESS station, start the number with a letter that indicates the OE type (A, G, E, or N).TSPID: Populated by the system during EWSD Switch Synchronization and cannot be edited. The TerminalService Profile Identifier (TSPID) is a link to the Terminal Service Profile database. Only ISDN stations will haveTSPIDs. The TSPID plus the TID form the SPID (Service Profile Identifier).Active Date: Populated by the system, this field indicates when the station edit will occur. When accessing theStation Editor from the Explorer, the Active Date field displays the time the Editor was opened. Execution of theorder occurs when the Execute button is clicked. When accessing the Station Editor from an order, the ActiveDate field displays the time that the order will process.

5.4.7.2 Checkbox Panel Template - Click this check box if you want to save this station as a template rather than an actual station. Update Database Only - Click to update the C3C® system records but not external equipment. This is useful

when fine-tuning the synchronization of new installations, but should be used sparingly, as it can cause the C3C®database to not match the external equipment. Do not use when editing directory information, location, etc.




5.4.8 General Tab (Station on CS1K switch)Assign a user-defined description to the station, including its TN value.



5-16

5.4.8.1 Input PanelIf editing a station, all previous edits display. If creating a new station, most fields are blank. If creating a stationfrom a template, fields populated in the template will be pre-populated accordingly.

Description: Required. Accepts keyboard input. The name assigned to the station is used most often.Location: Optional. Accepts keyboard input. Examples include building, lab, room, or cubicle numbers.Billable Telephone Number: The number that will be billed. If the BTN is not provided, it will default to theprimary directory number of the station.Customer: The name of the organization to which the station is assigned. A Customer is required fornew stations. This field is pre-populated in existing stations and cannot be edited.

Folder: The drop-down list shows Station Folders created for customer in Customer field. The station beingedited resides in selected folder. For further information on Station Folders, see Organizing Stations in Folders.Switch: The station being edited will reside on the selected switch, which must have been created for the customerdisplayed in the Customer field. This field is pre-populated and cannot be edited.TN: The Terminal Number for the stationActive Date: Populated by the system, this field indicates when the station edit will occur. When accessing theStation Editor from the Explorer, the Active Date field displays the time the Editor was opened. Execution of theorder occurs when the Execute button is clicked. When accessing the Station Editor from an order, the ActiveDate field displays the time that the order will process.

Line Card Type: Populated during CS1K Switch Synchronization, and cannot be edited. When you create astation, the field will display: "Unavailable".

5.4.8.2 Checkbox Panel Template - Click this check box if you want to save this station as a template rather than an actual station. Update Database Only - Click to update the C3C® system records but not external equipment. This is useful

when fine-tuning the synchronization of new installations, but should be used sparingly, as it can cause the C3C®database to not match the external equipment. Do not use when editing directory information, location, etc.





5-17

5.4.8.3 Message BoxesDisplays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When a switcherror occurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violation messageis too long to display in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visible portion of themessage. Click and drag on the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/or adjust the panesize. Messages may result from invalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab.

5.4.9 Features Tab (Station on DMS switch)Indicate the Station Model and assign Features. Feature parameters are edited here.

Note: C3C® supports the addition of PIC and LPIC of the Primary MADN to the non-primaryappearances of MADN. When adding a secondary MADN, the PIC and LPIC settings shall be inheritedfrom the primary, or parent, appearance.



5-18

5.4.9.1 Station Model PanelThe Station Model panel allows selection and display of the station's phone set type, along with key selectionindicators and interactive drag-and-drop.

Station Model:Drop down list for selecting a phone set for the station.

ZoomWhen checked, the station model display is magnified.

Phone Set tabDisplays an image of the selected Station Model.

Allows drag-and-drop from Feature Palette on to keys.

If a key is selected on the Feature Detail panel, a bluearrow points to the key on the phone image.

Allows selection of a key by clicking on the key in thephone set image. The matching key on the FeatureDetail panel will also highlight.

Additional tab (M518 example)Additional tabs display when a button add-on typefeature is applied to the station. Clicking the additionaltab displays an image of the add-on. The add-on imageincorporates the same functionality as the Phone Settab. (drag-and-drop, key selection indicators)

5.4.9.2 Feature Detail PanelUse the Feature Detail panel to apply, delete, or edit features and their parameters.

Butto DescriptionAdd a feature (opens Feature Palette)

Delete a selected feature from a key.This button is only active when youhave selected a Feature.Undo last Delete. Only active whenyou have selected a Feature that ismarked for deletion.Collapse the Feature Parameter Tree

Expand the Feature Parameter Tree

Opens the associated Group within theGroup Editor. Only active when aGroup feature has been selected.



5-19

Note: If you mark a feature for deletion, C3Cwill mark dependant feature(s) for deletion aswell. However, if you undelete the initialfeature, the undelete is not extended to the otherfeatures and you will have to undelete themindividually.

5.4.9.2.1 Features

Click on a key, open the Feature Palette , and double-click a feature to add features. Or, click in a Key Fieldand type Feature mnemonic (3WC for Three Way Calling). Add multiple features by separating each mnemonicwith a space (DN 3WC CFB). Or, drag a feature from the Feature Palette and drop it into the key tree or actualkey on the phone image. When a feature requires parameter values, click in the Parameter Field and select fromits drop-down list or type in a value. Delete a feature from a key by clicking on the feature to select it, then

clicking . C3C® checks validity of feature actions and responds with an icon and/or rule violation message.

Icon DescriptionAction Approval

The action on this key and/or the Feature meets rule requirements.The action on this key and/or the Feature does not meet rule requirements.

Feature Status(Blank) Existing Feature that has not been modified this session.

Existing Feature will be modified when this station order is processed.Feature will be deleted when this station order is processed.Feature will be added when this station order is processed.

5.4.9.2.2 DN Browser

Click the ellipses button inside the DN parameter field of the DN feature: DN , to access DN

Browser and find available DNs. Enter a portion of a DN (area code minimum) in DN prompt field, then click theellipses button, or wait until the Browser opens and enter a partial DN. The DN Browser displays the first twentyavailable DNs matching the partial DN entered. Select a DN for use in the DN prompt field. The DN Browsersearches in the DN Range tab of the Customer Details window for DNs not already associated with a station.

Partial DN: Enter full or partial DN (area code minimum). Data entered in the Station Editor appears in this field.Button Description

Searches Customer's DN Range tab for available DNs matching the Partial DN. Matches (up to 20)display in the Available DNs panel. Active when at least an area code is entered in Partial DN field.

The DN Browser closes and the selected DN is applied to the DN field on the Station Editor. Thisbutton is only active when a DN has been selected.



5-20

Closes the DN Browser without applying a DN.

5.4.9.2.3 Feature Palette

Displays when is clicked on the Feature Detail panel. The Feature Palette lists features you can assign to astation set or a specific key.

• Use the scroll bar

• Type the first letter of the code. The palette will auto-scroll to the firstmatching code. Subsequent typing of the same letter will display thenext matching code.

• Click one of the left side tabs to auto-scroll to the correspondingseries.

• The list can be alphabetically sorted by Code or Description. Click acolumn header to sort by that column. Click again to toggle betweenascending and descending order.

Button DescriptionApplies the selected feature to the selected key, and closes the Feature Palette.This button is only active when a key has been selected.Applies the selected feature to the selected key, and keeps the Feature Paletteopen. This button is only active when a key has been selected.Closes the Feature Palette without assigning a feature to any key.( Previous clicks on Apply button will still be in affect. )

To select a feature for key assignment, click on the key in the Feature Detail or Station Model panelassign the feature. (Analog stations default to key 1). Assign a feature using the following options:

• Highlight a feature in the Feature Palette. Click OK to assign feature and close the Feature Palette.

• Highlight a feature in the Feature Palette. Click Apply to assign feature and keep the Palette open.

• Double-click a feature, and it will be applied to the selected Key and keep the Palette open.

5.4.9.3 Message Boxes

Displays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When aswitch error occurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violationmessage is too long to display in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visibleportion of the message. Click and drag on the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/oradjust the pane size. Messages may result from invalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab.

5.4.9.4 Error and Warning MessagesRule violation messages and error warning boxes help you avoid sending bad information to the switch ordatabase. Feature compatibility and Valid Feature Parameters rules are some checks performed to fill in the fieldsof the Station Editor. When a rule violation occurs, a message indicates what to edit. When you make the changeand the violation is cleared, the message disappears. Suppose you receive a message warning that the LEN youentered is already in use. By typing in an unused LEN, the error message disappears. Click the OK button and the



5-21

warning box closes. If a rule violation message displays, type in a new unused DN, and the message disappears.Often, a violation is not reported until you submit an order to the switch. Click on a Switch Error message todisplay the Switch Notes (offending command and resulting error) in the right pane. Make the appropriate change,and resubmit your order.

5.4.10 Features Tab (Station on CS2K switch)Indicate the Station Model and assign Features. Feature parameters are edited here.




5-22

5.4.10.1 Station Model PanelThe Station Model panel allows selection and display of the station's phone set type, along with key selectionindicators and interactive drag-and-drop.




Allows drag-and-drop from Feature Palette on to keys.

If a key is selected on the Feature Detail panel, a bluearrow points to the key on the phone image.

Allows selection of a key by clicking on the key in thephone set image. The matching key on the FeatureDetail panel will also highlight.

Additional tab (M518 example)Additional tabs display when a button add-on typefeature is applied to the station. Clicking the additionaltab displays an image of the add-on. The add-on imageincorporates the same functionality as the Phone Settab. (drag-and-drop, key selection indicators)

5.4.10.2 Feature Detail PanelUse the Feature Detail panel to apply, delete, or edit features and their parameters.

Button DescriptionAdd a feature (opens Feature Palette)

Delete a selected feature from a key.This button is only active when youhave selected a Feature.Undo last Delete. Only active whenyou have selected a Feature that ismarked for deletion.Collapse the Feature Parameter Tree


Opens the associated Group within theGroup Editor. Only active when aGroup feature has been selected.



5-23

Note: If you mark a feature for deletion, C3Cwill mark dependant feature(s) for deletion aswell. However, if you undelete the initialfeature, the undelete is not extended to the otherfeatures and you will have to undelete themindividually.

5.4.10.2.1 Features

Click on a key, open the Feature Palette , and double-click a feature to add features. Or, click in a Key Fieldand type Feature mnemonic (3WC for Three Way Calling). Add multiple features by separating each mnemonicwith a space (DN 3WC CFB). Or, drag a feature from the Feature Palette and drop it into the key tree or actualkey on the phone image. When a feature requires parameter values, click in the Parameter Field and select fromits drop-down list or type in a value. Delete a feature from a key by clicking on the feature to select it, then

clicking . C3C® checks validity of feature actions and responds with an icon and/or rule violation message.

Icon DescriptionAction Approval

The action on this key and/or the Feature meets rule requirements.The action on this key and/or the Feature does not meet rule requirements.

Feature Status(Blank) Existing Feature that has not been modified this session.

Existing Feature will be modified when this station order is processed.Feature will be deleted when this station order is processed.Feature will be added when this station order is processed.





Searches Customer's DN Range tab for available DNs matching the Partial DN. Matches (up to 20)display in the Available DNs panel. Active when at least an area code is entered in Partial DN field.

The DN Browser closes and the selected DN is applied to the DN field on the Station Editor. Thisbutton is only active when a DN has been selected.



5-24



Displays when is clicked on the Feature Detail panel. The Feature Palette lists features you can assign to astation set or a specific key.


• Type the first letter of the code. The palette will auto-scroll to the firstmatching code. Subsequent typing of the same letter will display thenext matching code.

• Click one of the left side tabs to auto-scroll to the correspondingseries.

• The list can be alphabetically sorted by Code or Description. Click acolumn header to sort by that column. Click again to toggle betweenascending and descending order.

Button DescriptionApplies the selected feature to the selected key, and closes the Feature Palette.This button is only active when a key has been selected.Applies the selected feature to the selected key, and keeps the Feature Paletteopen. This button is only active when a key has been selected.Closes the Feature Palette without assigning a feature to any key.( Previous clicks on Apply button will still be in affect. )

To select a feature for key assignment, click on the key in the Feature Detail or Station Model panelassign the feature. (Analog stations default to key 1). Assign a feature using the following options:

• Highlight a feature in the Feature Palette. Click OK to assign feature and close the Feature Palette.

• Highlight a feature in the Feature Palette. Click Apply to assign feature and keep the Palette open.




5.4.10.4 Error and Warning MessagesRule violation messages and error warning boxes help you avoid sending bad information to the switch ordatabase. Feature compatibility and Valid Feature Parameters rules are some checks performed to fill in the fieldsof the Station Editor. When a rule violation occurs, a message indicates what to edit. When you make the changeand the violation is cleared, the message disappears. Suppose you receive a message warning that the LEN youentered is already in use. By typing in an unused LEN, the error message disappears. Click the OK button and the



5-25

warning box closes. If a rule violation message displays, type in a new unused DN, and the message disappears.Often, a violation is not reported until you submit an order to the switch. Click on a Switch Error message todisplay the Switch Notes (offending command and resulting error) in the right pane. Make the appropriate change,and resubmit your order.

5.4.11 Features Tab (Station on 5ESS switch)Indicate the Station Model and assign Features. Feature parameters are also edited here.




5-26

5.4.11.1 Station Model PanelSelect and display the station's phone set type, along with key selection indicators and interactive drag-and-drop.




5.4.11.2 Feature Detail PanelThe Feature Detail panel is where you can apply, activate/de-activate, delete, or edit features and their parameters.

Button DescriptionAdd a feature (opens the Feature Palette)

Delete a selected feature from a key. Only active when you select a Feature. Also used toDeactivate a Configuration Group feature.Undo last Delete. Only active when you select a Feature marked for deletion.

Collapse the Feature Parameter Tree


Activate a selected Configuration Group feature (ISDN only)

De-activate a selected Configuration Group feature (ISDN only). This function is onlyavailable within the same edit session that the feature was Activated



5-27

Button DescriptionNote: If you mark a feature for deletion, C3C will mark dependant feature(s) for deletion as well.However, if you undelete the initial feature, the undelete is not extended to the other features and youwill have to undelete them individually.

5.4.11.2.1 Key Feature tabThe Key Feature tab houses the Tool Button Bar for working with features. Just below the Tool ButtonBar, the text from the Description field on the General tab displays. Below that is the Key Tree. The firstitem in the Key Tree is the Set area. Below the Set area (for ISDN phone sets), each Key on the Phone setis displayed. The Set area and Keys are explained below.

Set area The Set area of the key tree displays the features applied to the phone set as opposed to beingapplied to individual keys. The Set area can be expanded to show all the Set Features or collapsed to show only thefirst Set Feature by clicking the plus/minus box to the left of the Set area icon. For ISDN stations, Set Features arelimited to Code Set and Button/Code features. For those features that can be invoked with a Button or a Code, theyonly reside in the Set area in their Code activated state.If a Button/Code Feature has been activated on the Configuration Group on Key 3, and if a differentConfiguration Group not including that Feature is applied to the station, the Activated Button/CodeFeature will move from Key 3 and be listed in the Set area. If that feature had never been Activated, itwould have been removed from the Key. If the original Configuration Group (or one that has the sameButton/Code Feature) is again applied to the station, then the feature will move from the Set area and onlydisplay on the Key. Analog type phone sets can use any feature listed in the Feature Palette and all areapplied to the Set area. The features within an applied BRCS Feature Group (BFG) are also displayed inthe Set Area. The feature names of BFG Features are Italicized and underlined.

Keys (ISDN Only) A Key displays for each key available on the phone set. Configuration Group featuresand DNs (Call Appearances) display on the keys to which they have been assigned. Click the plus/minus box to theleft of the Key to show all the Features assigned to the Key or only the first Feature.

5.4.11.2.2 FeaturesAdd features to a Set or to an individual Key (ISDN only). C3C® enforces the following rules for ISDN:



5-28

• A DN (Call Appearance) can be added to a Key. If you attempt to place a DN on the Set area, C3C® willignore the action.

• Code set features can only be added to the Set. If you attempt to place a Code set feature on a Key, C3C®will automatically move that feature to the Set area.

• Button Features within a Configuration Group are automatically assigned to the appropriate Key.

• If you add a Button Feature to a Key via a Configuration Group, it is Inactive (not added to the Line).

• Activated Button/Code Features residing on the Set area (not part of current Configuration Group)will move to a Key if a new Configuration Group including that feature on one of its keys is applied.The Button/Code Feature will retain its Activated state.

• Activated Button/Code features applied to a Key via a Configuration Group are automatically movedto the Set area if a new Configuration Group is assigned that does not include that feature.

5.4.11.2.2.1 Adding Features• Add features by clicking on the Key or Set, then open Feature Palette and double click a feature. Or,

click in a Key or Set Field and type the Feature mnemonic (abbreviation for the feature). Multiplefeatures can be added by separating each mnemonic with a space.

• Use the mouse pointer to drag a feature from the Feature Palette and drop it onto the key tree. Note:Analog sets will only have the Set area for dropping.

• On the General tab of the Station Editor, selecting a Config Group (ISDN sets) or BRCS FeatureGroup (Analog sets) will apply all the features within the group to the key tree.

If a feature requires parameter values, click in Parameter field, select from its drop-down list, or type in a value.

5.4.11.2.2.2 Deleting FeaturesDelete a feature from a key by clicking on the feature, then clicking . Features part of a BRCS Feature Group(BFG) cannot be individually removed. The entire BFG must be removed from the Station Editor's General tab.

5.4.11.2.2.3 Feature States and PromptsC3C® checks the validity of feature editing actions and responds with an Action Approval icon, Feature Statusicon, and/or rule violation message. Feature displays depend on how or when they were applied to the station. TheLine attributes of a station comprise part of the Primary DN “feature”. The telephone number (TN), TerminalType, and Suspend status are prompt values listed under the DN “feature”.

Indicator DescriptionAction

The action on this feature meets the minimum prompt requirements and/or the feature meets ruleThe action on this feature does not meet the minimum prompt requirements and/or the feature does

t t l i t ( l i l ti l di l )Feature Status(Blank) Existing Activated feature that has not been modified this session.

Existing Activated feature will be modified when this station order is processed.Feature will be deleted when this station order is processed.Feature will be added when this station order is processed.Feature has been added via a Config Group, but not Activated (added to the Line).

Feature TypeMLHG Constructed Feature applied as a stand-alone feature or part of a Config Group.MLHG Constructed Feature applied as part of a BFG./ACBC Pre-constructed Feature applied as a stand-alone feature or part of a Config Group./ACBC Pre-constructed Feature applied as part of a BFG.



5-29

Feature

Indicates the adjacent listing is a feature prompt or parameter for the feature and/or Prompt FolderIndicates that additional prompts can be accessed by clicking the plus sign next to the Prompt





Searches Customer's DN Range tab for available DNs matching the Partial DN entered. Matches (up to 20)display in the Available DN panel. Active when at least an area code is entered in the Partial DN field.The DN Browser closes and the selected DN is applied to the DN field on the Station Editor. This button isonly active when a DN has been selected.



Displays when is clicked on the Feature Detail panel, and lists features to assign a station key. Pre-constructed features are listed with a slash "/" preceding the name, while Constructed features are not.

Features can be located using these options:

• Use the scroll bar or click the left side tabs to auto-scroll to thecorresponding series.

• Type the first letter of the code. The palette will auto-scroll tothe first matching code. Subsequent typing of the same letter willdisplay the next matching code.

• The list can be alphabetically sorted by Code or Description.Click a column header to sort by that column. Click again totoggle between ascending and descending order.

Button DescriptionApplies the selected feature to the selected key, and closes the Feature Palette.This button is only active when a key has been selected.

Applies the selected feature to the selected key, and keeps the Feature Paletteopen. This button is only active when a key has been selected.



5-30

Closes the Feature Palette without assigning a feature to any key.( Previous clicks on Apply button will still be in affect. )

To select a feature for key assignment, first click on the key within the Feature Detail or Station Modelpanel to which you want the feature assigned. (For an analog station, you do not need to select a key; itwill default to key 1.) Then, assign a feature using the following options:

• Highlight feature within the Feature Palette. Click OK to assign feature and close the Feature Palette.

• Highlight feature within the Feature Palette. Click Apply to assign feature and keep the Palette open.


5.4.11.2.5 Config Group tabOn ISDN stations, select and view the Configuration Group that is/will be applied. The ConfigurationGroup tab displays the keys in the Configuration Group with a Feature assigned (and the feature name).Hover the mouse pointer over a feature name to display its English description. If editing or creating anISDN station, assign a Configuration Group to the station by selecting it from the drop-down list. Ifediting or creating an Analog station, you cannot select a Configuration Group.

5.4.11.2.6 Feature Group tabThis tab lets you select and view the BRCS Feature Group that is/will be applied to the station.

The Feature Group tab displays the features in the BRCS Feature Group. Hover the mouse pointer over afeature name to display its English description. This field is populated by its drop-down list, whichdisplays BRCS Feature Groups imported with the 5ESS BRCS Feature Group Synchronization job in theApplication Administration module's System Scheduler. The selections in this field apply all the featuresin the group to the station, and each feature is added to the Key Tree on the Station Editor's Feature tab.




5-31


5.4.11.4 Error and Warning MessagesRule violation messages and error warning boxes help avoid sending bad information to the switch or database.Feature compatibility and Valid Feature Parameters rules are checks that fill in the fields of the Station Editor.When a rule violation occurs, a message indicates what to edit. When the violation is cleared, the messagedisappears. Suppose you receive a message warning that the LEN you entered is already in use. By typing in anunused LEN, the error message disappears. Click the OK button and the warning box closes. If a rule violationmessage displays, type in a new unused DN, and the message disappears. Often, a violation is not reported untilyou submit an order to the switch. Click on a Switch Error message to display the Switch Notes (offendingcommand and resulting error) in the right pane. Make the appropriate change, and resubmit your order.

5.4.11.5 Station Model PanelDrop down list for selecting a phone set for the station. Select and display the station's phone set type with keyselection indicators and interactive drag-and-drop.

Zoom When checked, the station model display is magnified.Phone Set tab Displays image of the selected Station Model. Allows drag-and-drop from Feature Palette onto the set.

5.4.11.6 Feature Detail PanelApply, activate/deactivate, delete, or edit features and their parameters.

Button DescriptionAdd a feature (opens the Feature Palette)



5-32

Delete a selected feature from a key. This button is only active when you haveselected a Feature. Also used to Deactivate a Configuration Group feature.Undo last Delete. Only active when you select a Feature marked for deletion.

Collapse the Feature Parameter Tree


Activate a selected FKMP feature if feature is not already on station

De-activate a selected FKMP feature). Only available within the same edit sessionin which the feature was Activated

Note: If you mark a feature for deletion, C3C will mark dependant feature(s) for deletion aswell. However, if you undelete the initial feature, the undelete is not extended to the otherfeatures and you will have to undelete them individually.

5.4.11.6.1 Key-Feature tabThe Key Feature tab houses the Tool Button Bar for working with features. Just below the Tool ButtonBar, the text from the Description field on the General tab displays. Below that is the Key Tree. The firstitem in the Key Tree is the Set area. Below the Set area (for ISDN phone sets), each Key on the Phone setis displayed. The Set area and Keys are explained below.

Set area The Set area of the key tree displays the features applied to the phone set as opposed to beingapplied to individual keys. The Set area can be expanded to show all the Set Features or collapsed to show only thefirst Set Feature by clicking the plus/minus box to the left of the Set area icon. For ISDN stations, Set Features arelimited to Code Set and Button features. For those features that can be invoked with a Button or a Code, they onlyreside in the Set area in their Code activated state.

Keys (ISDN Only) A Key displays for each key available on the phone set. Feature KeyManagement Profile (FKMP) features and DNs (Call Appearances) display on the keys to which they havebeen assigned. Click the plus/minus box to the left of the Key to show all the Features assigned to the Keyor only the first Feature.

Add features to a set by clicking the set, opening the Feature Palette, and double clicking a feature. Or, click thekey set field, and type the feature mnemonic. Add multiple features by separating each mnemonic with a space(DN DTM EBO), or drag a feature from the Feature Palette to the designated area on the key tree.

When a feature requires parameter values, click in the Parameter Field and select from its drop-down list or type ina value. In C3C®, the line attributes of a station are part of the Primary DN “feature” (when available). Thetelephone number (TN), Call Type, Category, and Customer Access Treatment Code (CATCODE) are prompt

values listed under the DN “feature”. Delete a feature from a key by clicking on the feature, then clicking .

C3C® checks for the validity of feature editing actions and responds with an Action Approval icon, Feature Statusicon, and/or a rule violation message. The manner in which a feature(s) is displayed depends on how or when theywere applied to the station. The icons and indicators are explained in the table below.



5-33

Indicator DescriptionAction Approval

The action on this feature and/or the feature meets prompt/rule requirements.The action on this feature and/or the feature does not meet prompt/rule requirements (a ruleviolation message is displayed).

Feature Status(Blank) Existing Activated feature that has not been modified this session.

Existing Activated feature will be modified when this station order is processed.Feature will be deleted (or deactivated) when this station order is processed.Feature will be added (or activated) when this station order is processed.Feature has been added via a Config Group, but not Activated (added to the Line).

5.4.11.6.2 DN BrowserClick the ellipses button to access the DN Browser inside the DN parameter field of the DN feature: DN

. The DN Browser finds available directory numbers.

Enter a portion of a DN (area code minimum) in the DN parameter field, then click the ellipses button. Or, waituntil the Browser opens, and enter a partial DN there. The DN Browser displays the first twenty available DNsthat match the partial DN you entered. Select one of the DNs for use in the DN prompt field. The DN Browsersearches in the DN Range tab of the Customer Details window for DNs not already associated with a station.

Partial DN: Enter a full or partial DN. Data entered in the Station Editor will appear in this field. When searchinglarge quantities of DNs for availability, reduce search times by entering more digits in the partial DN.

Button DescriptionSearches Customer's DN Range tab for available DNs matching Partial DN. Matches (up to 20) display inthe Available DN panel. Active when at least an area code has been entered in the Partial DN field.

The DN Browser closes and the selected DN is applied to the DN field on the Station Editor. This buttonis only active when a DN has been selected.



Displays when is clicked on the Feature Detail panel. The Feature Palette lists features you canassign to a key or set on a station.



5-34

Features can be located using different options:



• Click the left side tabs to auto-scroll to the correspondingseries.

• The list can be alphabetically sorted by Code or Description.Click a column header to sort by that column. Click again totoggle between ascending and descending order

Button DescriptionApplies the selected feature to the selected key, and closes the Feature Palette.This button is only active when a key has been selected.Applies the selected feature to the selected key, and keeps the Feature Palette open. This button isonly active when a key has been selected.Closes the Feature Palette without assigning a feature to any key.( Previous clicks on Apply button will still be in affect. )

After selecting a key or the set, features can be assigned using the following options:• Highlight the feature in the Feature Palette. Click OK to assign feature and close Feature Palette.

• Highlight feature in the Feature Palette. Click Apply to assign feature and keep Feature Palette open.

• Double-click a feature to apply it to the selected key /set and keep the Feature Palette open.5.4.11.6.4 Key Management tab

Review the Configuration Group that is/will be applied to the station (only relevant for ISDN stations).

The Key Management tab displays the keys with a Feature assigned (and the Feature name). Hover themouse pointer over a Feature name to display the description of the feature. The Profile field is populatedfrom its drop-down list. If editing or creating an ISDN station, assign a key set to the station by selectinga group from the drop-down list. If you are editing or creating an Analog station, you cannot select a keymanagement set.




5-35

Displays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When a switcherror occurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violation messageis too long to display in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visible portion of themessage. Click and drag on the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/or adjust the panesize. Messages may result from invalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab.


5.4.12 Feature Tab (Station on CS1K Switch)Indicate the Station Model, assign Features, and edit feature parameters here.


5.4.12.1 Station Model PanelDrop down list for selecting a phone set for the station. Select and display the station's phone set type with keyselection indicators and interactive drag-and-drop.

Zoom When checked, the station model display is magnified.Phone Set tab Displays image of the selected Station Model. Allows drag-and-drop from Feature Palette onto the set.



5-36

5.4.12.2 Feature Detail PanelApply, activate/deactivate, delete, or edit features and their parameters.

Button DescriptionAdd a feature (opens the Feature Palette)Delete a selected feature from a key. This button is only active when you haveselected a Feature. Also used to Deactivate a Configuration Group feature.Undo last Delete. Only active when you select a Feature marked for deletion.Collapse the Feature Parameter TreeExpand the Feature Parameter Tree

Note: If you mark a feature for deletion, C3C will mark dependant feature(s) for deletion aswell. However, if you undelete the initial feature, the undelete is not extended to the otherfeatures and you will have to undelete them individually.

5.4.12.2.1 Key-Feature tabThe Key Feature tab houses the Tool Button Bar for working with features. Just below the Tool ButtonBar, the text from the Description field on the General tab displays. Below that is the Key Tree. The firstitem in the Key Tree is the Set area. Below the Set area (for ISDN phone sets), each Key on the Phone setis displayed. The Set area and Keys are explained below.

Set area The Set area of the key tree displays the features applied to the phone set as opposed to beingapplied to individual keys. The Set area can be expanded to show all the Set Features or collapsed to show only thefirst Set Feature by clicking the plus/minus box to the left of the Set area icon. For ISDN stations, Set Features are



5-37

limited to Code Set and Button features. For those features that can be invoked with a Button or a Code, they onlyreside in the Set area in their Code activated state.

Keys (ISDN Only) A Key displays for each key available on the phone set. Feature KeyManagement Profile (FKMP) features and DNs (Call Appearances) display on the keys to which they havebeen assigned. Click the plus/minus box to the left of the Key to show all the Features assigned to the Keyor only the first Feature.

Add features to a set by clicking the set, opening the Feature Palette, and double clicking a feature. Or, click thekey set field, and type the feature mnemonic. Add multiple features by separating each mnemonic with a space(DN DTM EBO), or drag a feature from the Feature Palette to the designated area on the key tree.

When a feature requires parameter values, click in the Parameter Field and select from its drop-down list or type ina value. In C3C®, the line attributes of a station are part of the Primary DN “feature” (when available). Thetelephone number (TN), Call Type, Category, and Customer Access Treatment Code (CATCODE) are prompt

values listed under the DN “feature”. Delete a feature from a key by clicking on the feature, then clicking .

C3C® checks for the validity of feature editing actions and responds with an Action Approval icon, Feature Statusicon, and/or a rule violation message. The manner in which a feature(s) is displayed depends on how or when theywere applied to the station. The icons and indicators are explained in the table below.

Indicator DescriptionAction Approval

The action on this feature and/or the feature meets prompt/rule requirements.The action on this feature and/or the feature does not meet prompt/rule requirements (arule violation message is displayed).

Feature Status(Blank) Existing Activated feature that has not been modified this session.

Existing Activated feature will be modified when this station order is processed.Feature will be deleted (or deactivated) when this station order is processed.Feature will be added (or activated) when this station order is processed.Feature has been added via a Config Group, but not Activated (added to the Line).

5.4.12.2.2 DN BrowserClick the ellipses button to access the DN Browser inside the DN parameter field of the DN feature: DN

. The DN Browser finds available directory numbers.

Enter a portion of a DN (area code minimum) in the DN parameter field, then click the ellipses button. Or, waituntil the Browser opens, and enter a partial DN there. The DN Browser displays the first twenty available DNsthat match the partial DN you entered. Select one of the DNs for use in the DN prompt field. The DN Browsersearches in the DN Range tab of the Customer Details window for DNs not already associated with a station.

Partial DN: Enter a full or partial DN. Data entered in the Station Editor will appear in this field. When searchinglarge quantities of DNs for availability, reduce search times by entering more digits in the partial DN.

Button DescriptionSearches Customer's DN Range tab for available DNs matching Partial DN. Matches (up to 20) display inthe Available DN panel. Active when at least an area code has been entered in the Partial DN field.



5-38

The DN Browser closes and the selected DN is applied to the DN field on the Station Editor. This buttonis only active when a DN has been selected.



Displays when is clicked on the Feature Detail panel. The Feature Palette lists features you canassign to a key or set on a station.

Features can be located using different options:



• Click the left side tabs to auto-scroll to the correspondingseries.

• The list can be alphabetically sorted by Code or Description.Click a column header to sort by that column. Click again totoggle between ascending and descending order

Button DescriptionApplies the selected feature to the selected key, and closes the Feature Palette.This button is only active when a key has been selected.Applies the selected feature to the selected key, and keeps the Feature Palette open. This buttonis only active when a key has been selected.Closes the Feature Palette without assigning a feature to any key.( Previous clicks on Apply button will still be in affect. )

After selecting a key or the set, features can be assigned using the following options:• Highlight the feature in the Feature Palette. Click OK to assign feature and close Feature Palette.

• Highlight feature in the Feature Palette. Click Apply to assign feature and keep Feature Palette open.

• Double-click a feature to apply it to the selected key /set and keep the Feature Palette open.5.4.12.2.4 Config Group tab

Review the Configuration Group that is/will be applied to the station (only relevant for ISDN stations).

The Configuration Group tab displays the keys in the Configuration Group with a Feature assigned (and theFeature name). Hover the mouse pointer over a Feature name to display the description of the feature. TheConfiguration Group field is populated from its drop-down list. If editing or creating an ISDN station, assign aConfiguration Group to the station by selecting a group from the drop-down list. If you are editing or creating anAnalog station, you cannot select a Configuration Group.



5-39


Displays in the left pane any station rule violations in affect if viewing the Features or General tab. When a switcherror occurs, click the notice in the left pane to view the error message in the right pane. When a violation messageis too long to display in the current pane width, the "..." characters display at the end of the visible portion of themessage. Click and drag on the pane's right border to maximize the Station Editor window and/or adjust the panesize. Messages may result from invalid or missing field data from the General or Features tab.


5.4.13 Directory Tab (Station on any Switch)Lets you assign additional information (pager, email address, etc.) to the primary subscriber of the station. TheProperty Name field is determined by the data entered under the Directory Info tab of the Provisioning tab ofthe Customer Details dialog box. This information also displays within the Directory Number Report.



5-40

5.4.14 Assigning Feature Packages to a StationAfter creating a feature package (in Section 5.12.7), the service provider has to assign it to a station. Click

on the C3C header bar to open the Station Explorer. Choose a service provider and clickFind to display the list of associated stations on the right.

5.4.14.1 The Station dialog boxDouble click on a station to open the Station dialog box.



5-41

5.4.14.1.1 The Station dialog box General tabThe Station dialog box opens in the General tab. To assign a new feature package to a station, choose a newpackage from the Feature Package drop-down list.

After choosing a feature package, the list below the drop-down list will then display the features in this packageand pertinent information that relates to the chosen station (i.e. billing implications, compatibility, etc.).

5.4.14.1.2 The Station dialog box Features tabClick Features at the top of the Station dialog box to open the Features tab. This tab displays a picture of thephone, and shows how the newly assigned features are organized on the station. Notice that the list at the bottomdisplaying pertinent information about the features is still displayed.



5-42

5.5 Group ExplorerFind, edit, or create Station Groups (MLHG, CPU, MDN etc.).



5-43

5.5.1 5ESS Group Management


The New Group dialog box opens. Indicate the Service Provider, Customer, Switch, and Type of group youwant to create. The dialog box is followed by the Group Editor.Active when one or more groups are selected. If one group has been selected, click this button to open theselected group in the Group Editor. If selecting multiple groups, click this button to open the Order Editor.

5.5.3 Selection PanelSearch for station groups with individual fields or combine them to narrow down a search. For example, searchfor groups using "TSTDMS", by selecting it from the Switch field drop-down list, then clicking Find. Or, beforeclicking Find, select "Randall Industries” from the Customer field's drop down list. The search results would thenshow all Randall Industries groups that also use switch "TSTDMS".

Service Provider Limit results to groups belonging to selected service provider.Customer Limits results to groups belonging to selected customer.Switch Limits results to groups located on the selected switch.Group ID Search for groups by Groups ID w/ or w/o the version number (1234 -1 or 1234). No wildcarding allowed.Name Search for groups with the Group Name you enter. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".Type Limits find results to groups that are of the selected type. A selection is first required in the Switch field.Member DN Search for groups that contain a member station using the DN you enter. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".Member OE/LEN Limit the search to groups with a member using a LEN. You may use wildcards "?" and "*". A selectionis required in the Switch field.Description Search for stations by the text that was entered on their Description field. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".

Click Reset to clear all selections or entries from the Finder tab by clicking this button.



5-44

Click Find to initiate the search after entering or selecting your search criteria. The Find button does not become activeuntil you have entered input in one of the criteria fields.

5.5.4 Display PanelThe Display Panel lists the groups found as a result of the choices you have made in the Selection Panel.

Each group is represented by a row. There are six columns of information for each row:

Column Description

First Column (blank title)

Displays the status of the group. Pending groups cannot be included in multiple group selections.A – Active: Group is active with no pending orders.P – Pending: Group has a pending order against it.

Group ID This C3C® exclusive number, following the dash (-), is used for internal tracking. Each time agroup is modified, the version number increases by one.

Name This C3C® exclusive name can be edited in the Group Editor.Type Indicates the group type. (MLHG, MDN, CPU, etc)

Members Indicates the number of members that are in the group.Description This is a C3C® exclusive description can be edited in the Group Editor.



5-45

5.5.5 Group EditorDisplay the characteristics of a group (and its members), and edit/review these attributes.

5.5.5.1.1 Title BarDisplays the Group ID number for the current group. This C3C® exclusive number is used for internal tracking.

5.5.5.2 Tool Button Bar (Main)Button Description

Saves the currently displayed Group Order. The Order remains open, allowing further editing.

Submits the Group edits immediately, regardless of what is listed in the Processing Date/Time field ofthe underlying order. The Processing Order status box appears.Opens the Order Editor. The window displays the order in which the current Group edits reside. Fromthe Order Editor, schedule the order for processing.



5-46

5.5.5.3 Group Detail Panel

Name: Give the group a meaningful name (up to 20 characters). If reviewing a group, this field displays the entrymade during group creation. You can edit this field except for an already processed order.

Description: Give group a descriptive name (up to 50 characters). If reviewing a group, field displays the entrymade during group creation. You can edit this field except for an already processed order.

Customer: Displays the Customer who owns the lines in this group. This field cannot be edited.

Switch: Displays the Switch the lines of this group work from. This field cannot be edited.

Active Date: Populated by the system, this field indicates when the group edit is scheduled. The Active Date fielddisplays when the Editor was opened. Execution of the order occurs when the Execute button is clicked. Whenaccessing the Group Editor from an order, the Active Date field displays the time that the parent order isscheduled for processing.

Property and Value: The right hand side of the Group Details Panel contains the properties specific to the group.The first column lists the Group Property, and the second lists the value for that property. The group type you areediting determines the properties you will see.

5.5.5.4 Tool Button Bar - MembersButton Description

Add additional members to the group. Selecting this option brings up the Group Wizard.

Edit opens the Station Editor for a member. Only one member may be selected at a time.

When a group member is selected, click to remove that member from the Group.

Toggle Primary, only available on the MDN Group Editor, changes selected member to thePrimary of the group and removes the Primary designation from the existing Primary.



5-47

5.5.5.5 Display Panel – Members

This panel above displays members in a group and describes their characteristics. Each member is represented by arow. The number of columns depends on the Group type. Unless otherwise indicated, the Columns below arecommon across groups.

Column DescriptionStatus

The group member is ready.The group member is not ready.

Action(Blank) No type of change is being requested for a particular group member.

Existing group member will be modified.

Existing group member will be deleted (or deactivated).

Existing group member will be added (or activated).

Station PDN The Primary Number of the Station where the group member appears.Station OE The Office Equipment for the group member.

Member Key The key on which the group member works.Description The Description of the Station where the member works.

Pilot Indicates if member is Pilot of MLH, DLH, or DNH group.Primary Indicates if this member is the Primary MDN appearance. Applies for Group Type MDN.

5.5.6 Group WizardClicking Insert on the Group Editor Member Toolbar. The Group Wizard adds members to a group. Onlyexisting stations may be added to a new group.

5.5.6.1 Group Wizard – GeneralAt the bottom of each screen in the Group Wizard are the buttons listed below.

Button Description

Goes back one window in the operation, unless you are on the Operation Complete window.

Move to the next window in the operation.

Move to Operation Complete window. Choices offered in skipped windows have default values applied.

Closes the Group Wizard window. If you are in an operation and are not at the Operation Completewindow, all functions of the operation are discarded.

5.5.6.2 Select Stations to AddIn the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, open the Select Station(s) for Wizard screen to select the stations toadd to the group. Once a station(s) have been added with the Add Stations button, they are listed in this table.



5-48

In the Select Station(s) for Wizard box (below), click Find or choose a folder and click Find. This will displaythe stations that can be added to the group. Highlight a station and click Insert to add it to the Select Station(s) toadd… box pictured above. Click the Selected checkbox to add the station to the group.



5-49

Once a station has been added to the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, highlight it to enable the Next button.Click Next to move on to the Assigning Keys portion of the Group Wizard.

5.5.6.3 Assigning KeysThe Group Wizard Assigning Keys dialog box is pictured below the table. Each potential new member isrepresented by a row in the table. The number of columns depends on the Group type. Unless otherwise indicated,the Columns below are common across groups. If the group is an MDN Group, the Assigning key(s)… dialog boxwill not feature a Keylist panel, instead featuring a Key No. drop down list, as shown in the graphic below.

Column DescriptionID This C3C® exclusive number, following the dash (-), is used for internal tracking. Each time a

station is modified, the version number increases by one.DN Indicates the Primary Number of the Station where the group member will appear.

LEN Indicates the Office Equipment for the potential group member.

Key No Lists available keys for assigning the group member. Select the key on which you want thisgroup member to work. If the station is an IBN, the key number will default to Key 1.

KeylistIndicate the keylist for a CPU group. This field only appears for CPU groups. Determine whichkeys to add to the keylist, by using the keylist selector.



5-50

5.5.6.3.1 Key List Selector WindowThe Key List Selector lets you select which keys to include in the key list. The left side of the screen displays the keys onthe business set that could be assigned in key list. The right side displays the keys chosen for the key list. Hover yourmouse over the DN Feature for a description on the feature.



5-51

5.5.6.3.2 Key List Selector Buttons

Button Description

Adds keys selected from the Available Key(s) list to the Selected Key(s) list.

Removes keys selected from the Selected Key(s) list to the Available Key(s) list.

Indicates you have completed your selection and returns you to the Group Editor window. Once inthat window, click Save to save additions and modifications.

Indicates you are canceling your changes, and exiting the Key List Selector without saving.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The New Group dialog box opens. Indicate the Service Provider, Customer, Switch, and Type of group youwant to create. The dialog box is followed by the Group Editor.Active when one or more groups are selected. If one group has been selected, click this button to open theselected group in the Group Editor. If selecting multiple groups, click this button to open the Order Editor.

5.5.8 Selection PanelSearch for station groups with individual fields or combine them to narrow down a search. For example, searchfor groups using "TSTDMS", by selecting it from the Switch field drop-down list, then clicking Find. Or, beforeclicking Find, select "Randall Industries” from the Customer field's drop down list. The search results would thenshow all Randall Industries groups that also use switch "TSTDMS".

Service Provider Limit results to groups belonging to selected service provider.Customer Limits results to groups belonging to selected customer.Switch Limits results to groups located on the selected switch.Group ID Search for groups by Groups ID w/ or w/o the version number (1234 -1 or 1234). No wildcarding allowed.



5-52

Name Search for groups with the Group Name you enter. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".Type Limits find results to groups that are of the selected type. A selection is first required in the Switch field.Member DN Search for groups that contain a member station using the DN you enter. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".Member OE/LEN Limit the search to groups with a member using a LEN. You may use wildcards "?" and "*". A selectionis required in the Switch field.Description Search for stations by the text that was entered on their Description field. You may use wildcards "?" and "*".

Click Reset to clear all selections or entries from the Finder tab by clicking this button.Click Find to initiate the search after entering or selecting your search criteria. The Find button does not become activeuntil you have entered input in one of the criteria fields.

5.5.9 Display PanelThe Display Panel lists the groups found as a result of the choices you have made in the Selection Panel.

Each group is represented by a row. There are six columns of information for each row:

Column Description

First Column (blank title)

Displays the status of the group. Pending groups cannot be included in multiple group selections.A – Active: Group is active with no pending orders.P – Pending: Group has a pending order against it.

Group ID This C3C® exclusive number, following the dash (-), is used for internal tracking. Each time agroup is modified, the version number increases by one.

Name This C3C® exclusive name can be edited in the Group Editor.Type Indicates the group type. (MLHG, MDN, CPU, etc)

Members Indicates the number of members that are in the group.Description This is a C3C® exclusive description can be edited in the Group Editor.



5-53

5.5.10 DMS/CS2K Group EditorDisplay the characteristics of a group (and its members), and edit/review these attributes.

5.5.10.1.1 Title BarDisplays the Group ID number for the current group. This C3C® exclusive number is used for internal tracking.


Saves the currently displayed Group Order. The Order remains open, allowing further editing.

Submits the Group edits immediately, regardless of what is listed in the Processing Date/Time field ofthe underlying order. The Processing Order status box appears.Opens the Order Editor. The window displays the order in which the current Group edits reside. Fromthe Order Editor, schedule the order for processing.

5.5.10.3 Group Detail Panel

Name: Give the group a meaningful name (up to 20 characters). If reviewing a group, this field displays the entrymade during group creation. You can edit this field except for an already processed order.



5-54

Description: Give group a descriptive name (up to 50 characters). If reviewing a group, field displays the entrymade during group creation. You can edit this field except for an already processed order.

Customer: Displays the Customer who owns the lines in this group. This field cannot be edited.

Switch: Displays the Switch the lines of this group work from. This field cannot be edited.

Active Date: Populated by the system, this field indicates when the group edit is scheduled. The Active Date fielddisplays when the Editor was opened. Execution of the order occurs when the Execute button is clicked. Whenaccessing the Group Editor from an order, the Active Date field displays the time that the parent order isscheduled for processing.

Property and Value: The right hand side of the Group Details Panel contains the properties specific to the group.The first column lists the Group Property, and the second lists the value for that property. The group type you areediting determines the properties you will see.

5.5.10.4 Tool Button Bar - MembersButton Description

Add additional members to the group. Selecting this option brings up the Group Wizard.

Edit opens the Station Editor for a member. Only one member may be selected at a time.

When a group member is selected, click to remove that member from the Group.

Toggle Primary, only available on the MDN Group Editor, changes selected member to thePrimary of the group and removes the Primary designation from the existing Primary.

5.5.10.5 Display Panel – Members



5-55

This panel above displays members in a group and describes their characteristics. Each member is represented by arow. The number of columns depends on the Group type. Unless otherwise indicated, the Columns below arecommon across groups.

Column DescriptionStatus

The group member is ready.The group member is not ready.

Action(Blank) No type of change is being requested for a particular group member.

Existing group member will be modified.

Existing group member will be deleted (or deactivated).

Existing group member will be added (or activated).

Station PDN The Primary Number of the Station where the group member appears.Station OE The Office Equipment for the group member.

Member Key The key on which the group member works.Description The Description of the Station where the member works.

Pilot Indicates if member is Pilot of MLH, DLH, or DNH group.Primary Indicates if this member is the Primary MDN appearance. Applies for Group Type MDN.

5.5.11 Group WizardClicking Insert on the Group Editor Member Toolbar. The Group Wizard adds members to a group. Onlyexisting stations may be added to a new group.

5.5.11.1 Group Wizard – GeneralAt the bottom of each screen in the Group Wizard are the buttons listed below.

Button Description

Goes back one window in the operation, unless you are on the Operation Complete window.

Move to the next window in the operation.

Move to Operation Complete window. Choices offered in skipped windows have default values applied.

Closes the Group Wizard window. If you are in an operation and are not at the Operation Completewindow, all functions of the operation are discarded.

5.5.11.2 Select Stations to AddIn the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, open the Select Station(s) for Wizard screen to select the stations toadd to the group. Once a station(s) have been added with the Add Stations button, they are listed in this table.



5-56

In the Select Station(s) for Wizard box (below), click Find or choose a folder and click Find. This will displaythe stations that can be added to the group. Highlight a station and click Insert to add it to the Select Station(s) toadd… box pictured above. Click the Selected checkbox to add the station to the group.



5-57

Once a station has been added to the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, highlight it to enable the Next button.Click Next to move on to the Assigning Keys portion of the Group Wizard.

5.5.11.3 Assigning KeysThe Group Wizard Assigning Keys dialog box is pictured below the table. Each potential new member isrepresented by a row in the table. The number of columns depends on the Group type. Unless otherwise indicated,the Columns below are common across groups. If the group is an MDN Group, the Assigning key(s)… dialog boxwill not feature a Keylist panel, instead featuring a Key No. drop down list, as shown in the graphic below.

Column DescriptionID This C3C® exclusive number, following the dash (-), is used for internal tracking. Each time a

station is modified, the version number increases by one.DN Indicates the Primary Number of the Station where the group member will appear.

LEN Indicates the Office Equipment for the potential group member.

Key No Lists available keys for assigning the group member. Select the key on which you want thisgroup member to work. If the station is an IBN, the key number will default to Key 1.

KeylistIndicate the keylist for a CPU group. This field only appears for CPU groups. Determine whichkeys to add to the keylist, by using the keylist selector.



5-58

5.5.11.3.1 Key List Selector WindowThe Key List Selector lets you select which keys to include in the key list. The left side of the screen displays the keys onthe business set that could be assigned in key list. The right side displays the keys chosen for the key list. Hover yourmouse over the DN Feature for a description on the feature.



5-59

5.5.11.3.2 Key List Selector Buttons

Button Description

Adds keys selected from the Available Key(s) list to the Selected Key(s) list.

Removes keys selected from the Selected Key(s) list to the Available Key(s) list.

Indicates you have completed your selection and returns you to the Group Editor window. Once inthat window, click Save to save additions and modifications.

Indicates you are canceling your changes, and exiting the Key List Selector without saving.

5.5.12 Hunt Group ConfigurationA hunt group provides a series of telephone lines organized in such a way that when a call comes in and the firstline is busy, the next line is hunted until a free line is found. For example, a call could come in to Station 1, and, ifnot answered, travels to Station 2, then to Station 3, and so on until the call is answered. In some cases, the callcould travel in circles until a free line is found. In other cases, it might reach the end of the list and go to voicemail.There are some limitations to the hunt group configuration process. A new MLH or DLH pilot cannot be activated onKey 1 through the Group Editor. These stations must be activated separately with the Station Editor.

5.5.12.1 Creating a new Directory Number Hunt group with new stations5.5.12.1.1 Starting the Group and Creating New Stations

Open the Group Explorer by clicking on the C3C Main tab.

Click to create a new group. Enter the pertinent information in the New Group dialog box (listed first), and clickOK to open the New Group status box.



5-60

Click to open the Order New Order status box.



5-61

Click to add a new station(s) to the hunt group. Enter the pertinent information and click OK.

The new station(s) will be displayed in the Order New Order status box.



5-62

Highlight a station and double-click it to open the Station- New Station editor. Enter pertinent information as described insection 5.4.3.1, and repeat for all new stations.

5.5.12.1.2 Completing the Group Wizard

Close the Station Editor. From the Group Editor, click to open the Group Wizard.



5-63

In the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, the new stations created in the previous step will be available to add to the group. If

you would also like to add previously existing stations to the group, click to open the Select Station(s) forWizard screen to select the stations to add to the group. Once a station(s) has been added with the Add Stations button, it is listedin this table. In the Select Station(s) for Wizard box (below), click Find or choose a folder and click Find. This will display thestations that can be added to the group. Highlight a station and click Insert to add it to the Select Station(s) to add… box picturedabove. Click the Selected checkbox to add the station to the group.



5-64

Once a station has been added to the Select Station(s) to add… dialog box, highlight it to enable the Next button. ClickNext to move on to the Assigning Keys portion of the Group Wizard.

The Group Wizard Assigning Keys dialog box is pictured. Each potential new member is represented by a row in the table.The number of columns depends on the Group type. Unless otherwise indicated, the Columns below are common acrossgroups.



5-65

The Key List Selector lets you select keys to include in the key list. The left side of the screen displays the keys on thebusiness set that could be assigned in key list. The right side displays the keys chosen for the key list.

Highlight an available key, and click to add it to the Selected Key(s) column.

Highlight a selected key, and click to remove it from the Selected Key(s) column.

Click OK to save the changes and proceed to the Assigning Key(s) dialog box. Click Cancel to discard them.

In the Assigning Key(s) dialog box, click Finish to execute the group. This will add the group to the Group Editor for any futuremodifications. The new stations will be activated on the switch during processing.

5.5.12.2 Creating a new Directory Line Hunt or Multi-Line Hunt Group with new stationsA new group can be started by one of three methods. First, you can create a new station on which to place the group pilot,and add the Group feature to Key 1. Second, you can Create a new station on which to place the group pilot, and add theGroup feature to a key other than Key 1. Third, you can use an existing station on which to place the group pilot. If using anexisting station, you may only place the group feature on a key other than Key 1.



5-66

Open the Station Explorer and start a new station as described in section 5.4. Remove the DN feature from key 1, andthen add the appropriate group feature to key 1. Then fill in all remaining prompts, and then execute the station. The newgroup will now be available in the Group Explorer for editing as described in section 5.5.Open the Station Explorer and start a new station as described in section 5.4. Fill in all necessary prompts for the DNfeature on key 1. Add the group feature to an unused key, fill in necessary prompts, and then execute station. The newgroup will now be available in the Group Explorer for editing as described in section 5.5.Select the station from the Station Explorer to which you would like the group pilot added, and open it for editing. Add thegroup feature to an unused key, fill in necessary prompts, and then execute station. The new group will now be available inthe Group Explorer for editing as described in section 5.5.

Finally, to add new stations to the new group that has been created, follow the instructions described in section 5.5.

5.6 Subscriber ExplorerThe Subscriber Explorer is used to configure subscriber MCS settings. It also links to the Station Editor to editsubscriber voice service settings.5.6.1 Navigating the Subscriber Explorer ConsoleClick Subscribers on the C3C main desktop to open the Subscriber Explorer. Subscriber Finder is the only tab.

5.6.1.1 Subscriber FinderThe Subscriber Finder displays subscriber information based on the criteria chosen in the Search for subscribers sectionof the Subscriber Explorer window.

5.6.1.1.1 Title BarThe Title Bar displays the title of the selected dialog box.5.6.1.1.2 Selection PanelUnder the Subscriber Finder tab, enter and choose the following information to select a subscriber with which to work:

Service Provider: Name of the Service ProviderCustomer: Name of the CustomerSubscriber ID: A unique ID assigned by C3C. It is only used to uniquely identify a subscriber with C3C.



5-67

Subscriber Name: Name of the SubscriberDN: Subscriber’s Directory Number

Once you have entered the desired information, click Find to retrieve any subscriber(s) that matches theinformation entered in the Selection Panel.

Click Reset to clear the fields in the Selection Panel.5.6.1.1.3 Display PanelDisplays the information you have found based on the data entered into the Selection Panel.

Subscriber ID: A unique ID assigned by C3C. It is only used to uniquely identify a subscriber with C3C.Name: Name of the SubscriberCustomer: Name of the Customer

5.6.1.1.4 Tool Button BarOnce you have highlighted a selection in the Display Panel, use the following buttons to perform actions on your selection:

Highlight a subscriber and click Edit to open the Subscriber Editor and edit a current subscriber.

Click New to open the Subscriber Editor and add a new subscriber.

Click to delete a subscriber from the subscriber display panel.

Reruns the selection criteria query to ensure that the list of subscribers is current.

5.6.1.2 Subscriber FoldersTo find a subscriber using the Subscriber Folders selection tab, select the folder or subfolder in which the customerresides, and then choose from the list on the right.

Click New to create a new folder or subfolder

Highlight a folder or subfolder and click Edit to change the name of that folder.

Highlight a folder or subfolder and click Delete to remove that folder from the Selection Panel.



5-68

5.6.2 Creating and Editing MCSHighlight a selection in the Display Panel, and click New or Edit to create or edit a subscriber.

5.6.2.1 Creating a New SubscriberClick New to open the New Subscriber dialog box. Choose a Customer from the drop down selection tab, andclick OK to accept your choice and open the Subscriber Editor dialog box. Click Cancel to close the dialog boxwithout choosing a customer.

5.6.2.2 Editing an Existing SubscriberClick Edit to open the Subscriber Editor dialog box with the selected subscriber pre-populating the informational areas.Clicking OK on the New Subscriber dialog box opens the same box. Once the Subscriber Editor dialog box is launched,enter a Name for the subscriber (if it is a new subscriber). The Customer box will be filled in based on your choice in theNew Subscriber dialog box and cannot be edited.

To add a new service, click New to open the New Service dialog box.

Click Edit to open the Station Editor.

Click Delete to remove a service.

Click Verify to ensure that the service is functioning properly. Sometimes, a change has been made onthe switch that can temporarily prevent a particular service from functioning properly. The Verify buttonsynchronizes the station and the switch.

To accept changes made in the Subscriber Editor dialog box, click OK.

To close the box without accepting changes, click Cancel.5.6.2.2.1 Adding MCS as a New ServiceChoose MCS as your new service and click OK to open the MCS Editor dialog box.



5-69

5.6.2.2.1.1 MCS Editor Main tabNote: MCS users who add voice service should be aware of the following: If they change the DN for the station, instead ofthe original MCS user record being updated, a secondary record is created. The value of the Public Charge ID must matchthe DN on the C3C Subscriber record. If it does not, updating the subscriber record in C3C will create a new record becausethe DN and the Public Charge ID do not match.

* Required informarionMCS Domain A domain is an organizational construct for Nortel (including domains and sub-domains) whichdefines the parameters for a particular subset of users. This field specifies the domain to which the user belongs.User Name Unique user ID assigned when creating a user in MCS. Use lowercase letters. Does not have to be thesame name as the First Name.First Name Case sensitive. The first name, combined with the last name, forms the display name on the i2002 ori2004 Internet Telephone. Either first name or last name is a required field.



5-70

Last Name Case sensitive. The last name, combined with the first name, forms the display name on the i2002 ori2004 Internet Telephone. Either first name or last name is a required field.Password User password created and used in conjunction with the user name described above. In order to log intoMCS, a customer must provide a correct user name and a password.Service Package The list of service packages assigned to the user’s domain or sub-domain.Status Determines if the user is active or inactive within the domain.Status Reason User’s status value.Email User’s email address.Business Phone Business phone number.Home Phone Home phone number.Cell Phone Cell phone number.Pager Pager number.Fax Fax numberPrivate Charge ID The Private Charge ID of the user.Public Charge ID The 10-digit national dial plan number associated with the subscriber. This is required forinterworking with Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) switches in the Time Division Multiplex (TDM)network. This number must match the user’s DN.Location The initial starting value from where the user is most likely to use the phone (i.e. home, office, etc.).Class of Service The name of the class of service (COS) assigned to the domain and user. The COS is displayed tothe administrator when modifying or assigning the COS to a domain/subdomain/user. Select “None Selected” tolimit the user to IP-only calls.Redirection Class of ServiceTime Zone Time zone to which the user belongs.Locale The user’s local environment including language, currency, and time and date parameters.Aliases The list of aliases for the user. Aliases associate a PSTN phone number to a username.

Click Execute to process the order and send the information to the switch or MCS.

To close the box without accepting changes, click Cancel.

5.6.2.2.1.2 MCS Editor Voicemail tabThe Voicemail tab lets the user enter pertinent information regarding voicemail services.

Voicemail Server The voicemail server available to the user.Voicemail The user’s voicemail address.





5-71

5.6.2.2.1.3 MCS Editor Meet Me Data tabThe Meet Me Data tab lets C3C administrators set up conference call parameters. The call moderator has a pin code used toinitiate the call, and the other callers have a pin to used to enter the call once it has been initiated.

Chair Ends Conference Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the Chair Ends Conference field to end theconference if the chairperson hangs up the call. If the checkbox is left unchecked, the conference is allowed tocontinue without the chairperson on the call.Chair Pin In the Chairperson PIN text box, enter a number (between 4 and 10 digits long) that the chairpersonuses to identify themselves. If this field is left blank a random Chair PIN will be selected. In the Access Code textbox, enter a number (between 4 and 10 digits long) that a conference participant must use to enter the conference.Send Instant Messages Given a list of users that will enter the conference call, checking this box allows a user toenter an IM conference with the selected users.Allow Audio Emoticons Check this box if you want to allow audio notificiations when someone enters or exits aconference call.Entry/Exit Announcements Determines the sounds displayed when a user enters or exits the conference call.



5.6.2.2.1.4 MCS Editor Converged Desktop tabThe Converged Desktop tab lets the end user configure their PCs for the multimedia portion of their communication, whileusing their existing telephony system for voice. When a user receives their service package (at Multimedia PC Clientstartup and on any changes to the subscriber data made by the administrator), and that service package contains ConvergedDesktop service, then that PC Client becomes a Converged Multimedia PC Client.

Alias This alias is used to identify calls that come from the SimRing feature that is assigned to the user on anexisting switching system. It must match the called party number that will be sent to the SIP Application Moduleon these SimRing calls.



5-72

Preferred Audio Device The number entered here must be the number that is required to route a call to the user'sphone and trigger the user's SimRing feature. This number should be unique for each user. This number is requiredso that regular clients (Multimedia PC Client, Multimedia Web Client, and the i2002 or i2004 Internet Telephonecontrolled through the IPCM) can call a converged PC Client by their SIP address (and not only by the PSTNequivalence number).User Type MCS can be deployed enterprise-wide (business or campus) or carrier-wide (phone service provider).This drop-down list determines which type the user is.



5.6.2.2.1.5 MCS Editor Routes tabSet up by either a carrier, customer, or, more likely, a user, an MCS route determines how a call will be answereddepending on such parameters as call source, time of day, area code, etc. For example, a user can decide that any calloriginating in the 314 area code with a destination of his office phone will go straight to voicemail between the hours of8:00am and 5:00pm. These sets of parameters are given a name (in the example below, “strata” or “strata1”) by the user,and are imported to C3C with the MCS Data Synchronization job.

Enter a route in the upper text box and click Add to add it to the Selected box below.

Heighten the priority of a route by highlighting it and clicking Up. This pushes the highlighted routeup one level, such that it’s parameters are taken into account before the parameters of any route listed below it.

Lower the priority of a route by clicking Down.

Highlight a route in the Selected box, and click Remove to remove it.



5.6.2.2.1.6 MCS Editor Unified Communications tabUnified communications allows the integration of voicemail and email. For example, a voicemail can be converted into a.wav file that is sent as an attachment to the user’s email. Or, an email can be converted by voice conversion software andsent to a user’s voicemail.



5-73

Mailbox ID This parameter is pre-populated by information entered in the Voicemail parameter under the MCSEditor Voicemail tab. This is usually a station number (i.e. the last four digits of a user’s DN)PIN Numeric password to access voicemailConfirm PIN Retype password.Account Status User’s account statusEmail ID The email address used in the unified communications process. C3C automatically populates this field.

5.6.3 Adding Voice as a New ServiceEditing or adding a new Voice Service requires using the Station Editor as described in the C3C Provisioning Guide(Section 5.4). Note: MCS users who add voice service should be aware of the following: If they change the DN for thestation, instead of the original MCS user record being updated, a secondary record is created. The value of the PublicCharge ID must match the DN on the C3C Subscriber record. If it does not, updating the subscriber record in C3C willcreate a new record because the DN and the Public Charge ID do not match.

Choose Voice as your new service and click OK to open the New Station dialog box.



5-74


" Under Choose Template click None and click OK to open the Station Editor" Or, click From List and click OK to open the New Station From List dialog box


Highlight a description and click OK to open the Station Editor.

5.6.4 Adding SelfCare as a New ServiceEditing or adding a new Self-Care Service requires using the Subscriber as described in the C3C ProvisioningGuide (Section 5.6.2). Open a Subscriber dialog box from the Subscriber Explorer main screen (described inSection 5.6.1) and click New to add a new service. Choose SelfCare from the drop-down list and click OK.



5-75

The Self-Care Management Properties dialog box opens blank. Enter your information and click OK.

Username: Customer UsernamePassword: Pasword chosen by customerConfirm Password: The customer verifies the pasword they typed above.Alias: A number that will be managed by the Self-Care user ID.Email: Customer email address

The SelfCare service appears in the Subscriber dialog box.

Click New to add another service. Click Edit to open the Self-Care Management Properties dialog box and editthe information you entered in the previous step. Click Delete to remove the service. The Verify button does notapply to SelfCare.

5.7 OrdersYou can group and schedule station provisioning activities. Orders apply station(s), and contain station actions fora single Customer. You can view orders for a Customer, including orders not created by that user (For example, a



5-76

Service Provider user can create an order for a Customer viewable by that Customer user). Orders display theUser ID of the order’s creator and the last user to modify the order.

C3C® submits and receives order results interactively (may not function on installations where real timesubmission orders is precluded by performance considerations). Schedule orders for processing, including anunlimited number of orders against a specific station. Incomplete or invalid orders can be saved for latercompletion, correction, or deletion. Pending orders can be viewed, modified and/or suspended indefinitely.Suspend pending work orders indefinitely and return suspended orders to pending status.

Create orders directly with the Order Browser/Order Editor or let the system create them for you by makingstation changes in Station Editor. Submissions through the Order Browser/Order Editor replace the Station Editorwhen multiple stations are involved and scheduling the execution of the order is important. Using the OrderBrowser/Order Editor groups similar actions together. An order can contain multiple actions on a single station ormultiple stations, if those stations belong to the same customer.

5.7.1 Order BrowserThe Order Browser is the central point for gaining access to station orders. From this window you can:

• Create new orders • Unschedule existing orders• Finalize existing orders • Perform Bulk Edits• Discard existing orders • Swap OE/LENS between stations• Open existing orders for editing, review or submission

5.7.1.1 Title BarThe title bar for the Order Browser indicates the active Filter By selection. In the example above, the title bar indicates thatFilter By selection is Current User, meaning any orders that match the search options were created by the current user.

5.7.1.2 Tool Button BarButton Description

Create a new order.

Open a selected order from the Order List Panel. You can modify an order that has not been markedas Complete, Finalized or Processed.

View the report version of a selected order from the Order List Panel.

Refresh the list of orders in the Order List Panel. This can capture any new orders that created sincethe list was first opened



5-77

Finalizing an order marks the order as complete. Finalize an order when no further action is necessary.For example, after “closing the loop”, verify that an end user’s service meets expectations. When anorder is finalized, any remaining station actions that have not been processed are discarded. An ordercan be set to finalize automatically upon completion by setting the appropriate check box in the OrderEditor. See Order Editor/Tab Panel for further details.

Discard a selected order from the Order List Panel.

Unschedule a selected order from the Order List Panel. (puts the order on hold)

5.7.1.3 Search Options PanelThe Order Browser can display just the orders that meet your selected search options. When a searchoption is left blank, an implied "all" selection for the option is assumed.

Order Status DescriptionAll All orders, regardless of status.

Not Finalized - All All orders that have not been finalized.Not Finalized - Complete Processed orders that are not finalized (does not include partial processed)

Scheduled Orders that are scheduled for processing at a future time.On Hold Orders that are on hold.

With Errors Orders that have an error listed.With Warnings Orders that when processed, received a warning message from the switch.

In Process Orders that have been submitted and are currently processing.Finalized Finalized orders that have not been purged.Suspect Scheduled orders that have conflicts due to prior orders created for same station(s).

Customer: Limit your search to orders belonging to selected customer. This field is pre-populated for Customertype users and cannot be edited.

Station Folder: Narrow a search to stations housed in a specific sub-folder. A selection is required in theCustomer field. The available selections in this field are limited to sub-folders belonging to that customer.

Filter By: Filter By options depend on if you are a System Administrator user, a Service Provider user, or aCustomer user. Also, the selection will affect the choices available in the User field.System Administrator type user:

Filter By Option DescriptionCURRENT USER Only orders that were created by the current user display.

SYS ADMIN USERS Only orders created by a System Administrator type user display.SERVICE PROVIDER USERS Only orders created by a Service Provider type user display.

CUSTOMER USERS Only orders created by a Customer type user display.ALL USERS All orders will display regardless of by whom they were created.

Service Provider type user:

Filter By Option DescriptionCURRENT USER Only orders that were created by the current user display.

SERVICE PROVIDER USERS Only orders created by a Service Provider type user display.CUSTOMER USERS Only orders created by a Customer type user display.

ALL USERS All orders will display regardless of by whom they were created.

Customer type user:

Filter By Option DescriptionCURRENT USER Only orders created by the current user display.



5-78

Filter By Option DescriptionCUSTOMER USERS Only orders created by a Customer type user display.

User: User options depend on if you are a System Administrator user, a Service Provider user, or a Customeruser, and the selection made in the Filter By field.

System Administrator type user:

Filter By Option User Option Description

CURRENT USER Defaults to Current User andcannot be edited.

Only orders created by the current user display.

SYS ADMIN USERS Lists all System Administratorusers in the C3C® system.

If a selection made: Only orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any System Administrator display.

SERVICEPROVIDER USERS

Lists all Service Providerusers in the C3C® system.

If selection made: Only orders created by the selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Service Provider will display.

CUSTOMER USERS Lists all customer users in theC3C® system.

If selection made: Only orders created by the selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Customer user display.

ALL USERS Lists all users in the C3C®system.

If selection is made: Only orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any user will display.

Service Provider type user:

Filter By Option User Option DescriptionCURRENT USER Defaults to Current User, cannot be edited. Only orders created by current user display.

SERVICEPROVIDER

USERS

Lists all Service Provider users associatedwith the selection displaying in the ServiceProvider field

If selection made: Orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Service Providerassociated with selection in Service Provider field display.

CUSTOMERUSERS

Lists all customer users associated with theselection displaying in the Customer field.

If selection made: Orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Customer userassociated with selection in the Customer field display.

ALL USERS

Lists all Service Provider users andcustomer users associated with theselection displaying in the ServiceProvider and Customer fields.

If selection made: Orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Service Provider userassociated with selection in Service Provider field or orderscreated by any Customer user associated with selection inCustomer field display.

Customer type user:

Filter By Option User Option DescriptionCURRENT USER Defaults to Current User, cannot be edited. Only orders created by current user display.

CUSTOMERUSERS

Lists all customer users associated with theselection displaying in the Customer field.

If selection made: Orders created by selected user display.If left blank: Orders created by any Customer userassociated with selection in the Customer field display.

Service Provider: Limit search to orders belonging to the selected Service Provider. This field is pre-populatedfor Service Provider and Customer type users and cannot be edited.

Switch: Limits search to orders against the stations residing on the selected switch.

Station DN: Limit search to orders that include the DN you enter.

Station OE: Limit search to orders containing stations that have OEs matching the OE you enter.

Order ID: Limit search to orders that match the Order ID you enter.

Cust Order ID: Limit search to orders that match the Cust Order ID you enter.

From Date/To Date: Limit search to orders scheduled to execute within indicated date range. Enter a From Dateand any orders scheduled after then will display. Enter a To Date to limit search to orders scheduled before date



5-79

entered. Entering both dates limits search to orders scheduled between two dates. To edit the date, click the drop-down arrow. The Calendar Picker displays. To edit the time, select the time portion to change and type in a value.

• Click the arrowbuttons to move the Calendar Pickerdisplay forward or backward until thedesired month is displayed.

• Click on the desired day within the display.

• The Calendar Picker closes and the selecteddate populates the date field.

5.7.1.4 Order List PanelThe Order List Panel displays all orders that meet the criteria you selected using the Search Optionspanel. If you have not selected from the Search Options panel, the default search is in place. The defaultsearch consists of Not Finalized orders created by the current user. This default view displays when youfirst open the Order Browser.

Each order is represented by a row across multiple columns. The columns have titles that reflect the Viewselected from the View Menu. Columns can be resized by hovering the mouse pointer over the column'sedge, then clicking and dragging the column edge until the desired width is obtained. The information inthe Order List Panel can be sorted on any column by clicking on a column title. Clicking a column titleagain will toggle the sort between ascending and descending direction.

5.7.1.5 Handling Partial Order FailuresA partial failure of an order can occur if some station action changes process successfully while othersfail. In the event of partial failure, the old order is marked “Processed”, and remaining changes are movedto a new order. The user can then modify this new order to fix the problem. A message "Order partiallyfailed. Unfinished changes moved to order ####." displays, and the new order is opened automatically.

5.7.2 Order EditorThe Order Editor can create or edit/review existing station actions. In addition to individual station actions,Station Groups (CPU, MDN, etc), Bulk Editing and Station Swap actions can be performed. Access Order Editorfrom the Order Browser or Station Editor windows. An order may contain a single station action or multipleactions and all can be scheduled or submitted for immediate processing.

The Status Bar at the bottom of the Order Editor provides additional information about the station(s) selected.This is especially useful when selecting a station from the Order Browser whose status is Unready. In the OrderEditor, you will see the following in this case:

Strata Group C3C® Provisioning Guide


5-80

5.7.2.1 Title BarDisplays the number for the order you are viewing. If the order develops errors or warnings, those will be indicated here.


Saves the currently displayed Order. The Order remains open, allowing further editing or creating.

Opens the Detailed Order Report for the currently displayed Order. This includes all station actionslisted within the Action List Panel. The report is displayed in PDF format.Submits the order immediately, regardless of the entry in the Processing Date/Time field. TheProcessing Order status box appears. There may be instances when a submitted order does not processdue to interrupted communications or other circumstances. After the offending circumstance has beeneliminated, you can resubmit the order for processing.Schedules the order for processing as indicated in the Processing Date/Time field. The Order Editorwindow closes and the Order Browser appears. When a submitted order does not process due tointerrupted communications or other circumstances, the order can be resubmitted after the offendingcircumstances are eliminated.Discards the currently displayed order. Clicking Yes on the confirmation box discards the order and itsassociated station actions. The Order Editor closes and the Order Browser displays.Puts on hold the currently displayed order. The Processing Date/Time field entry is ignored until theSchedule button is clicked.Opens the Order Change Summary Editor. It provides a quick view of each edit in the order, and allowsfor removal of an edit. For more information see Order Change Summary Editor



5-81

5.7.2.3 Order Detail PanelCustomer: Select the customer for which you want to place an order. Select available entries from thedrop-down list. A selection is required when creating a new order. If you are reviewing an existing order,this field displays the choice made at the time of creation, and cannot be edited.

Description: Your entry here displays in other windows when viewing multiple orders, and can identifythis order. If reviewing an existing order, this field displays the entry made during creation. You can editthis field except when reviewing an order that has processed.

Processing Date/Time: Indicates when order will process. During order creation, the field is populatedwith the current date and time. To edit the date, click the drop-down arrow. The Calendar Picker displays.

Click the arrow buttons to move the CalendarPicker display forward or backwarduntil the desired month is displayed.Click on the desired day within thedisplay.

The Calendar Picker closes and theselected date populates the datefield.

If you wish to edit the time, select the portion to change and type in a value. If you are reviewing anexisting order, this field displays the entry made during creation.

Cust Ord ID: This value can manually coordinate with any outside tracking mechanisms. This is not arequired field, and can be left blank. If you are reviewing an existing order, this field displays the entrymade during creation. You can edit this field except when reviewing an order that has processed.

5.7.2.4 Tab PanelThe Tab Panel provides access to the available sub-panels. Click a tab to access its panel.

Actions - Order actions and tool buttons are displayed on this tab. Actions are the Station edits, Groupedits, or Swaps contained with the current order. They are listed in the Action List panel below the tab.There are three modes available within this tab. Clicking on a mode button in the Function Select panellets you switch between the different functions.

Mode button Description

Stations

Lists stations that have actions within the current order. The tab's tool button bar for thismode displays buttons relevant to general Station actions. For more information, seeActions tab - Stations Mode.

Groups

Lists Station Groups (MDN, MLH, etc.) with actions in the current order. The tab's toolbutton bar for this mode displays buttons relevant to Group actions. For more information,see Actions tab - Groups Mode.

Swaps

Lists Station Swaps with actions in the current order. The tab's tool button bar for thismode displays buttons relevant to Swap actions. For more information see Actions tab -Swaps Mode.

Processing Options - Select how you want the order to process. The options are as follows:



5-82

Automatically close order upon completion: If checked, this option will give the order a "businessstatus" of closed after it has processed successfully. (Default is checked)

Run order even if not completely valid: If checked, this option will process an order, even if ruleviolations are displayed for the station action in the Station Editor window. When not checked, and ruleviolations exist, the processing will stop as soon as the pre-processing system checks are performed.

Update Database Only: Checking this checkbox causes ALL of the stations in the order to have the“Update database only” checked in their respective Station Editors. Un-checking this checkbox causesALL of the stations in the order to have the “Update database only” un-checked in their Station Editors.

Allow Changes from Interposed Order: If you do not want to allow an order to let interposed ordersaffect it, uncheck the Allow Changes from Interposed Order checkbox (Default is checked).

An interposed order contains a station that has a future scheduled action against it. Thedefault behavior for an interposed order "propagates" its actions to the future scheduledorder. For example, if you create an Order and then close it, the Feature changes fromthat Order are applied to any later Order that includes the same station. If you add 3WCto an interposed Order, then the Future Order will no longer remove it.

History - Displays a history of events for the displayed order. Each event will list the User, Entry Date,and Description for the event. The history events are system generated and cannot be edited.

Notes - This is a virtual notepad to enter text notes. The notes can be read and edited by any user that hasaccess to the order. Processed orders will not accept new edits.

Messages - Displays any system created messages associated with this order.

5.7.2.5 Actions tab - Stations ModeThese buttons are available on the Actions tab when the Stations Mode has been selected.

Button DescriptionAdds a station action of Activate to the order. The New Station dialog box displays, followedby the Station Editor.

Adds station action Modify to order, and opens Station Selector to select the station (s) to edit.

Adds a station action of Deactivate to the order. The Station Selector window opens, lettingyou select the station to disconnect.

Removes the selected station action from the order.

Adds station action Activate to order, copying attributes from a pre-existing station. TheStation Selector window opens. Select the station to copy. The Station Editor displays.Opens the selected station action for modification. The Station Editor window opens, lettingyou modify the selected station action.The Swap Editor trades the OE or LEN between complete stations and features, and appliesthem to single or multiple stations within a swap set. For further information, see Swap Editor.Opens Bulk Edit Wizard which performs mass edits on stations contained in the order. Formore information see Bulk Edit General.

5.7.2.5.1 Action List panel - Stations ModeThe Action List panel displays when the Action tab is selected. When in Stations Mode, the panel shows stationswhose actions are part of the order currently loaded in the Editor. Each station action is a row across five columns.Double click a station action to open it in the Station Editor. Once a station is opened in the Station Editor, you cancycle the Station Editor between the stations in the order using the Station Cycle buttons at the bottom of the Editor.The information found in the columns of the Action List panel is listed below:

Action - Displays the type of action that will be, (or has been), performed on the station:



5-83

Activate - A new station is activated.Deactivate - An existing station is deactivated.Modify - An existing station is modified or changed.Modify-Swap - An existing station is part of a Swap action.

Status - Displays the status of the station action:Processed - Action has been sent to the switch (or database), and implemented.Ready - Action has passed rule violation or completeness checks and is ready to be processed.Unready - Action has not passed rule violation or completeness checks and is not ready to be processed.

Station ID - The ID number for the station receiving the action.Station OE - The Office Equipment or number or LEN for the station receiving the action.Description - The text found in the Station Editor’s Description field for the station receiving the action.

5.7.2.6 Actions tab - Groups ModeThese buttons are available on the Actions tab when the Groups Mode has been selected.

Button DescriptionAdds a group action of Activate to the order. The New Group dialog box displays for you topick a switch and group type.Adds a group action of Modify to the order. The Group Selector window opens for you toselect the group (s) you want to edit.

Removes the selected group action from the order.

Opens the selected group action for modification. The Group Editor opens for you to modifythe selected group action.Adds a group action of Deactivate to the order. The Group Selector window opens for you toselect the group you want to disconnect.

5.7.2.6.1 Action List panel - Groups ModeThe Action List panel displays when the Action tab is selected. In Groups Mode, the panel shows groupswhose actions are part of the Editor’s currently loaded order. Each group action forms a row across sixcolumns. Double click a group action to open it in the Groups Editor, then cycle the Group Editorbetween the stations using the Group Cycle buttons at the bottom of the Editor. The information found inthe columns of the Action List panel is listed below:

Action - Displays the type of action that will be, (or has been), performed on the group:Activate - A new group is activated.Deactivate - An existing group is deactivated.Modify - An existing group is modified or changed.

Status - Displays the status of the group action:

Processed - Action has been sent to the switch (or database), and implemented.Ready - Action has passed rule violation and completeness checks and is ready to be processed.Unready - Action has not passed rule violation and completeness checks and is not ready to be processed.

Group ID - This is a C3C® exclusive number, following the dash (-), is used for internal tracking. Eachtime a group is modified, the version number increases by one.

Type - Indicates the group type.Name - The group name is displayed in this column.Description - The text as found in the Group Editor’s Description field.



5-84

5.7.2.7 Actions tab - Swaps ModeThese buttons are available on the Actions tab when the Swaps Mode has been selected.

Button DescriptionAdds a new Swap action to the order. Click to display the Stations for Swap dialog box,and select stations to include in the swap. Stations must be inserted into the order using theStations Mode before becoming available for selection in the Stations for Swap dialogbox. If there are no swap eligible stations in the order, the New button is grayed out.Select a swap action from the Action List panel, then click to open the Swap Editor,loaded with the swap action. This button is grayed out until a swap action is selected.Select a swap action from the Action List panel, and click to discard the selected swapafter confirmation. This button is grayed out until a swap action is selected.

5.7.2.7.1 Action List panel - Swaps ModeThe Action List panel displays when the Action tab is selected. When in Swaps Mode, the panel showsswaps whose actions are part of the order currently loaded in the Editor. Each swap set forms a folder. Ineach folder, the members (stations) of that swap set. form a row across four columns. Double click a swapfolder to toggle it between open or closed, hiding or displaying its members.

Station - Displays the swap set header, the DN for each member station, and swap direction indicators:

Swap Set Header - Swap description (from Swap Editor), swap member count, andstatus of the swap action.

Swap Member - Swap sort direction and DN for station.

Original OE - Displays the original OE/LEN for the swap member.

Planned OE - Displays the resulting OE/LEN for the swap member after the order executes.

Current OE - Displays current OE/LEN for swap member. If a partial failure occurs whenthe order executes, this lets you see when it failed and what action is needed.

5.7.2.8 Order Change Summary EditorClick Summary to access this window on Order Editor's main toolbar. The Order Change SummaryEditor summarizes edits in an order. For modifications to existing features, both the original and newvalue are displayed. When the edit adds a new feature, the new value is displayed. Each edit displays arow and an Undo Change checkbox. Click the checkbox to remove an individual edit item from an order.

When the window opens, only the station reference(s) for an edit action are visible. Click, , to the left ofa station reference, to expand the listing and show all edit items for that station. If a feature is listed as anedit and prompt values are included, the feature will have a , , for expansion to show the prompt values.



5-85

Button/Item DescriptionMarks an edit item for removal from the order.

Click to save your selections in the Undo Change column. The Order ChangeSummary Editor will close and you will return to the Order Editor.

Click to cancel any Undo Change selections you made and return to the Order Editor.

5.7.2.9 Swap EditorClick Swap on the Order Editor's tab toolbar to access this window. The Swap Editor trades the OE orLEN between complete stations (and features), applying them to single or multiple stations in a swap set.

5.7.2.9.1 Tool Button Bar

Button DescriptionClick to add a new swap set to the Swap Editor. If a station or swap header is selected, click to openthe Select a Station window to select a station from the parent order to add to the selected swap. Ifall stations from the parent order are already in a swap set, this button is grayed out.

If a swap header is selected, click to remove the entire swap set. If an individual station is selected,click to remove that station from its swap set.

Moves a selected station up the swap order within a swap set.

Moves a selected station down the swap order within a swap set.

5.7.2.9.2 Swap Editor RulesStations selected for a swap:



5-86

1. Must be Active (as opposed to a planned station)2. Must be of the same station type (IBN sets cannot be swapped with Multi-button sets, ISDN sets

cannot be swapped with ANALOG sets)3. DMS Multibutton sets must have a designated swapping LEN set up in Network Management.4. Cannot be Speed Call User (SCU) or Call Pickup (CPU) controllers.5. Cannot be a Hunt Group Pilot (DNH, DLH, MLH).6. Cannot have their OE/LEN manually edited within the same parent order.7. Cannot have a feature labeled as "Unsupported" on the Station Editor's Feature tab.8. Cannot have the 5ESS MDNL "feature" on the station.9. Cannot have the 5ESS MLHG "feature" on the station.10. Cannot have N type OEs.11. Before allowing EWSD stations to be swapped, C3C® validates that there exists an appropriate

temporary swap OE defined in C3C®.

5.7.2.9.3 Swap Detail Panel

Displays each swap set as a folder. Within each folder are the members (stations) of that swap set.

Station - Displays the swap set header, the DN for each member station, and swap direction indicators:

Swap Set Header - Switch name where stations reside, swap member count, andstatus of the swap set.

Swap Member - Swap sort direction and DN for station.

Original OE - Displays the original OE/LEN for the Swap Member.

Planned OE - Displays the resulting OE/LEN for the Swap Member after the order executes.

Current OE - Displays current OE/LEN for Swap Member. If partial failure occurs whenorder executes, this shows when it failed and what remedies are necessary.

5.7.2.9.4 Message PanelsDisplays any errors, rule violations, warnings or switch messages. Left Panel - Displays errors and warning messages. If you click on an error, the associated swap

member in the Swap Details panel is highlighted.

Right Panel - Displays any switch messages resulting from a failed swap action.

5.7.2.10 Bulk Edit General

Click on the Order Editor's tab toolbar to edit multiple stations simultaneously, includinggeneral station attributes and features. Features can be added, modified, or deactivated on the StationEditor on a single or multiple station(s). Bulk Edit is accessed from within an order. Once listed in yourorder, select the station(s), then click the Bulk Edit button to start the process.



5-87

5.7.2.10.1 Task List

Task Description

Add a Feature Adds a feature to all of the stations selected for Bulk Edit. Indicate the set, key, or keys towhich the feature should be applied, and if needed, the prompt values.

Modify a Feature Finds occurrences of a feature in selected stations and modifies them to a single specification.Indicate whether the feature edit should occur only when found on specific keys or any key.

Delete a Feature Finds occurrences of a feature in selected stations and deactivates it. Indicate whether thefeature deactivation should occur only when found on specific keys or any key.

Modify General StationAttributes Edit the Name, Description, and/or Folder fields and apply edits to selected stations.

Change Station Model Changes all selected stations to the Station Model you select (Will not change between Multi-button sets and IBN sets or ISDN and Analog).

Change BRCS FeatureGroup

Changes selected stations to either apply or remove the BRCS Feature Group (BFG) youselect.

Change Config Group Applies the indicated Configuration Group to all selected stations.Apply Templates Applies a template to all of your selected stations.

Apply a ShortcutPick from a list of predefined actions to apply to your stations.i.e. Find Call Forward features and change their Forward To DN to the specified DN.

5.7.2.10.2 Button BarSelect stations for Bulk Edit from the same switch type (5E stations cannot be mixed with DMS stations).



5-88

Button DescriptionGoes back one window in the operation unless you are on the Operation Complete window. You willthen return to the Task Selection window.

Go to next step in the task or the Operation Complete window if no further steps are needed.

Go to Operation Complete window. Choices offered in skipped windows have default values applied.

Closes Bulk Edit window. If not in Operation Complete window, all functions of operation arediscarded.

5.7.2.11 Bulk Edit - Adding a FeatureAdds a feature to all of the stations that were selected for Bulk Edit. You can indicate the set, key, or keysto which the feature should be applied, and if needed, the prompt values.

Feature Selector: Select the feature to add to stations selected for Bulk Edit. The drop-down list will onlypresent features compatible with the selected stations.Prompt Panel: Displays prompts when the selected feature has prompt values. Indicate, via a check-box,whether to propagate the prompt values to selected stations or leave them blank for manual editing. Within theStation Editor, some features have secondary prompts that only display if one of the primary prompt values deemsthem necessary. In the Bulk Edit window, secondary prompts display regardless of the primary prompt values.Key Specifier: Indicate to which key the feature you are adding should be applied, and the numbersand/or key ranges separated by commas. (On 5ESS stations use Set key). Example: Set,2,7,9,10-12,13-15

5.7.2.11.1 Pre-existing Feature ScenarioSometimes you might attempt to add a feature to stations on which that feature exists. In that case, BulkEdit shows how many of your selected stations have the feature. Choices are listed as radio buttonoptions. Select one option that will be applied to all stations with the pre-existing feature.



5-89

Will not alter pre-existing occurrences. If the pre-existing feature isnot on the target key, the result will be multiple instances of the feature. If on the same key(s), the pre-existingfeature will not be altered and the station will receive no change from this Bulk Edit operation.

Modifies every pre-existing occurrence of the feature, regardless of its key or setposition. Any prompt values from the previous Bulk Edit window will be applied to the pre-existing occurrences.

Will not alter existing occurrences unless found on key(s)specified in previous Bulk Edit window. Features found on targeted key(s) inherit prompt values from Bulk Edit.

Only modifies features if found on key(s) specified in this field. Applyprompt values from the previous Bulk Edit window to the existing occurrences if on the specified key(s).

5.7.2.12 Bulk Edit - Modifying a FeatureSelect a feature, edit its prompts, and then automatically modify that feature on selected stations to matchyour edits. Apply the edits on every occurrence of the feature, or specific key occurrences.



5-90

Feature Selector: Select a feature to modify on the stations selected for Bulk Edit. The drop-down list will onlypresent features found on selected stations.Prompt Panel: Displays prompts when the selected feature has prompt values. Indicate, via a check-box,whether to propagate the prompt values to selected stations or leave them blank for manual editing. Within theStation Editor, some features have secondary prompts that only display if one of the primary prompt values deemsthem necessary. In the Bulk Edit window, secondary prompts display regardless of the primary prompt values.Key Specifiers: Indicate which occurrences of the feature should be modified.

- All occurrences of the feature on selected stations will inherit the edits from Bulk Edit.

- Indicate whether to modify existing features if found on the specified key(s). Edits areapplied to existing occurrences if on the specified key(s). Indicate key numbers and/or key ranges separated bycommas. For 5ESS stations, use the Set key (Example: Set,2,7,9,10-12,13-15).

5.7.2.13 Bulk Edit - Deleting a FeatureSelect a feature, and then automatically remove that feature on your selected stations. You can removeevery occurrence of the feature, or only when it occurs on specific keys.



5-91

Feature Selector: Select the feature to deactivate from the stations selected for Bulk Edit. The drop-down listwill only present features found on selected stations.Key Specifiers: Indicate which occurrences of the feature should be deactivated.

- All occurrences of the feature on selected stations will be deactivated.

- Feature should only be deactivated if found on specified key(s). Enter key numbersand/or key ranges separated by commas. For 5ESS stations, use Set key. Example: Set,2,7,9,10-12,13-15

5.7.2.14 Bulk Edit - Modifying Station AttributesEdit the Description, Location, and Folder fields of a station, and then apply the edits to selected stations.

Description: In the Description field, enter text to apply to selected stations. Leaving this field blank will notcause your selected stations to inherit the blank.Location: Enter the text to apply to selected stations in the Location field. Leaving this field blank will not causeyour selected stations to inherit the blank unless you click the Change to Blank check-box.Folder: Populated from the drop-down list featuring Station Folders previously created for the customerassociated with the parent order of the Bulk Edit operation you are performing. Leaving this field blank will notcause your selected stations to inherit the blank.



5-92

5.7.2.15 Bulk Edit - Changing Station ModelSelect a feature, and then automatically remove that feature on selected stations. You can remove everyoccurrence of the feature, or only when it occurs on specific keys.

Select Model: Select the station model you want on selected stations. After selecting from the drop-down list, agraphic image of the model displays in the window.



5-93

5.7.2.15.1 Incompatible Station Model ScenarioIf you try to change to a station model not compatible with the stations selected for Bulk Edit, Bulk Editnotifies you and counts the stations that will be changed. Click the Next or Complete buttons to completethe operation, or click the Back button and select a station model appropriate for the selected stations.



5-94

5.7.2.16 Bulk Edit - Applying TemplatesSelect a template, and then automatically apply that template to your selected stations.

Select Template(s): Select from a list of compatible templates to apply to selected station types.



5-95

5.7.2.17 Bulk Edit - Applying ShortcutsChoose a shortcut, a collection of commonly performed operations, and apply it to selected stations.

Select a shortcut: Select an available shortcut, displayed in this panel, and apply it to your stations.

5.7.2.17.1 Change the Call Forward DNEnter a Call Forward To DN. When you apply the shortcut to your selected stations, all occurrences ofCall Forwarding features will inherit the Forward To DN you specified.

5.8 Advanced Voice Services (AVS)



5-96

5.8.1 DescriptionAVS, or Advanced Voice Services, are advanced services provided by the switch. The Service Provider can then providethese services to its Customers. AVS is currently being designed for five services or features on a DMS100 switch, but itcan be expanded to include other such services from different switch types. The known features include Meet-MeConference, Executive Conference, Preset Conference, Network Speed Call, and Call Forward Reason Display. Thesefeatures are applied on a switch-wide basis per customer group on the DMS switch instead of being "station" features thatare provisioned on stations. Creating, modifying and deleting these features requires table editing instead of issuing servordcommands.

The AVS module serves as the central managing point for the AVS features. From the AVS window, you can create a new feature,copy an existing feature, edit an existing feature, delete an existing feature, or verify an existing feature. Click the AVS button on themain C3C® Desktop to access this window.

5.8.2 Navigating the AVS ConsoleTo perform an action, click on a conference type in the left hand box, and choose a customer, switch ID, and descriptionfrom the Display Panel. This will highlight the action option bar at the top of the box.

5.8.3 The AVS Tool Button Bar

Button DescriptionClick to open the New Service dialog box. Choose the Service Provider, Customer, and Switch from thedrop down arrows on the right. Click OK to accept the choices, and click Cancel to close the box withoutaccepting changes. Clicking OK opens the edit box, and lets the customer enter values for the new feature.Click to open an editing dialog box. The purpose of Copy is to open an existing feature and create anotheridentical or almost identical feature. The message box at the bottom of the box will alert the user to theinformation required before clicking Execute. The message box will also describe any errors, as shownbelow. After having entered the required information, click Execute to add the new feature to the switch.Click to edit feature information. The message box at the bottom of the box will alert the user to theinformation required before clicking Execute. The message box will also describe any errors. After havingentered the required information, click Execute to update the switch.Click to delete the selected service. Click Yes on the Please Confirm dialog box to confirm your decision.Clicking No or Cancel will avoid service deletion.

Click to update C3C® to match the switch (if anything has been changed on the switch but not on C3C®).Click Hide Messages if you do not want to view the messages during the process. Click Close to cancel theprocess and close the box. The message box will display useful information in the case of a process failure.



5-97

5.8.4 The Selection Panel: Editing AVSThe New, Edit, and Copy buttons let the customer add and update AVS features. Clicking Execute in any of these boxes- given theentry of the proper information- will add a new feature to the switch, or update an existing feature.

5.8.4.1 Meet Me Conference

A meet-me conference lets end users meet in a conference call by dialing a meet-me conference directory number (DN) atan agreed-upon date and time. Because it provides a pre-assigned six-port conference bridge, an end user of a station canoriginate a Meet-Me Conference for a maximum of six parties. The end user must call the attendant to receive a DN for aconference bridge. The originator of the conference must inform all potential conference members of the DN before thestart of the conference. The meet-me conference functionality will be provided on a Customer Group basis for a givenCustomer and Switch in C3C®. Only the System Administrator can access this functionality.• The feature shall be assigned to a customer group through Table Edit.• There will be no limit as to how many customers can be assigned the feature at any given time.• A user can specify the DN used for the conference, That DN must be assigned to that customer group.• The following conference types will be supported: STD, FLASHONLY, CODEONLY, CNF6ADDON, and

CODEADDON.• Meet Me Conference has the capability to define the maximum number of participants up to thirty.



5-98

5.8.4.2 Executive Conference

Executive Conference enhances Meet Me Conference by allowing up to 150 participants, and by providing feature access codes tolock and unlock access to the conference. Highlight Executive Conference and a correlated feature. Click Edit to open theExecutive Conference dialog box.



5-99

5.8.4.3 Preset Conference

Lets a user at an MDC station, trunk, or attendant console dial a specified DN that activates the switching office andsimultaneously rings a maximum of 25 selected conference members. The conference begins when the first confereeanswers, and terminates when all conferees disconnect.Highlight Preset Conference and a correlated feature and click Edit to open the Preset Conference edit dialog box.

5.8.4.4 Network Speed CallThe Network Speed Call (NSC) feature lets a customer group define a common list of network speed calling numbers. TheNSC list is defined by using the table editor of a MAP (maintenance and administration position). The NSC list can bechanged or supplemented only from the MAP. Each customer group can define 1000 NSC numbers accessible to itsmembers.The network speed call functionality will be provided on a Customer Group basis for a given Customer and given Switchin C3C.

• This functionality will be accessible only to the System Administrator.



5-100

• The feature shall be assigned to a customer group through Table Edit.• The user shall be able to create a list of DNs to be a part of the network speed call for a given customer. These

DNs have to be assigned to the customer group in C3C.• The list shall be limited to 1000 numbers, as defined in the DMS100 translation guide.• The user shall be able to modify the network speed call list.

Highlight Network Speed Call and a correlated feature and click Edit to open the Network Speed Call dialog box.

5.8.4.5 Call Forward Reason DisplayCall Forward Reason Display (also known as Enhanced EBS Reason Display) lets Meridian business sets (MBS) displaymessages regarding the reason for a call redirection or the progress of the call.Highlight Call Forward Reason Display and a correlated feature and click Edit to open the Enhanced EBS ReasonDisplay edit dialog box.



6-1

6 Reports6.1 Provisioning reports

C3C® generates reports for most of its modules. For information on the Report Browser and viewing orprinting reports, see The Report Browser. These reports are available for the Provisioning module:

Station ReportsAll Switch TypesCall Forward DN Report Station Template ReportCall Forward Station Report Subscriber Station History ReportDirectory Number / Office Equipment Report Subscriber Station ReportDirectory Information Report Subscriber Station Report - Expert ViewDN Removal Report Subscriber Station Summary ReportFeatures Report Switch Synchronization ReportHistorical Station Report Virtual DN ReportFeature Prompt Value Report

5ESS Station ReportsCall Appearance Report Suspended DN Activity ReportLine Class Code Report Suspended DN Summary ReportSuspend Status Report

DMS Station ReportsNetwork Class of Service Report CICM Processed Stations Report

EWSD Station ReportsLine Class Code Report

Group Reports5ESS Group ReportsAuthorization Group Report Hunt Group ReportBRCS Feature Group Report Intercom Group ReportBRCS Feature Group Usage Report Series Completion ReportCall Pickup Group Report Speed Calling Group ReportConfiguration Group Report

DMS Group ReportsAuthorization Group Report MADN Group ReportCall Pickup Group Report SIMRING Group ReportGroup Intercom Report Speed Call Group ReportHunt Group Report

EWSD Group ReportsAuthorization Group Report Feature Key Management Profile ReportCall Pickup Group Report

Order ReportsAvailable Directory Number Report Performance ReportDetailed Order Report Planned Station Changes ReportFailed Order Station Report Processed Swap ReportOrder Processing Summary Report Station Processing Report



6-2

Pending Swap Report

View these reports in Acrobat PDF or HTML format. For PDF, the Acrobat Reader program automatically opensin your web browser, loaded with the report. For HTML, view the report through your web browser. You can limitreports to particular data sets (parameter values). For further information on the Report Browser and setting Reportparameter values, see The Report Browser.

6.2 The Report BrowserSelect reports from three categories, select specific information to include in the report, and then view iton line, print it, and/or schedule it.

Note: When running a C3C Report in Microsoft Internet Explorer, the report hijacks the lastused browser window to display the new URL. You then have to click “Back” on the browser toreturn to the former URL. If you want to keep both browsers open, open an Internet Explorerwindow. Go to Tools > Internet Options > Advanced > Browsing and uncheck "Reuse windowsfor launching shortcuts".

6.2.1 Selection PanelSelect a report from three categories, represented by a folder ( ). Clicking the plus sign ( ) in front of afolder displays the available reports. Click on a report to load it into the Parameter Panel, specificallydefine it, and select your output method with the Options Panel.

6.2.2 Parameter PanelSelecting a report loads parameters, categories of information contained in the report, into the ParameterPanel. Enter or select a value in the parameter to limit the report to items matching that parameter. Tomake a Parameter Value selection, find the parameter under the Parameter Name column, then click onthat row under the Parameter Value column. If the Parameter Value is a date, the Calendar Picker willdisplay. The calendar shows an entire month at a time. Scroll the month to display the correct year andmonth, then click a day to select it. If the Parameter Value is contained in a drop down list, a drop downarrow will appear in the Value column when you click your mouse in that column. Clicking the drop-down arrow will display the selection list.

Some Parameter Values are "open text" fields. If so, click the Value column, and enter the value by whichto filter. Combine parameter selections, make a single selection, or make no selection. For example:



6-3

Select the Order Processing Summary report. The available parameters are Customer, From DueDate and To Due Date. If you made no parameter selections, the report includes information forevery customer, and on every processed order included in the JSA system. Limit the report tojust "Customer A" by selecting that customer from the Customer parameter value list. Refine thereport by limiting it to orders processed since January 1, 2000. Select that date in the From DueDate parameter. The date and customer selection results in a report consisting of All processedorders for Customer A that had a due date greater than January 1, 2000.

6.2.3 Options PanelSelect sort options, decide to print or view the report, and schedule it for repeated generation.

Opens the Sort Criteria pop-up box.

Opens the Schedule Report window. This option is not available for all report types. The buttonwill be grayed out when the option is unavailable for a selected report.

Open the Processing Report pop-up box and a session of Acrobat Reader or your Web browser,loaded with the generated report.

Resets all parameters to their default values.6.2.3.1 Schedule Report

Click this button on the Report Browser to open the Schedule Report window, whichedits or creates jobs and defines when they should process.

6.2.3.1.1 Details tab

Job Name: Display or edit the name of the job you are viewing. The name of the report selected when theSchedule button was clicked is automatically loaded into this field. Make the name unique for each job.Activity: Select the activity to be performed by the job. The default value for reports is “REPORT PRINT”.Last Executed: Indicates the last time the job ran. This field and cannot be edited.Next Executed: Indicate when the job will run next. This field cannot be edited, although changes to theDate/Times tab will be reflected here.Parameter panel: Display or edit the parameters set up for the job’s activity. The displayed parameters dependon which activity is assigned to the job being viewed or edited. To change a parameter’s value, click in the Valuecolumn on the row of the parameter to edit. Values are text entries or are made from selections in a drop-down list.

Save edits or changes to the displayed job. The job will run as scheduled from the Date/Times tab.6.2.3.1.2 Date/Times tab



6-4

Specify the time(s), frequency, and/or calendar cycle to run a job. Time periods include a specific date, day or daysof the week, or day of the month. The time interval is the time that passes between each occurrence of the activity.The scheduler tab display allows selection options appropriate for the choices made in the Choose One: panel.

Current Date/Time: This display-only field reflects the current date and time on the PC’s operating system.Date panel: Indicate the date or days to run the job. Click the radio button in front of your choice to select it.

Day(s) of the Week: Lists the days of the week. Select days you want the job to run. Click in a day’scheckbox to toggle it on or off.

Day of the Month: Displays a single field for typing in the one day, each month, you want the job to run. Specific Date: Indicate a specific date you want the job to run. Click the drop-down arrow in the field that

displays when you select the Specific Date option. The Calendar Picker launches.

Click the arrow buttons tomove the Calendar Picker display forward or backwarduntil the desired month is displayed.Click on the desired day within the display.

The Calendar Picker closes and the selected datepopulates the field.

Time panel: Indicate specific times of day or a time interval when the job can run. The time interval is the timethat will pass between each occurrence of the activity. Click the radio button in front of your choice to select it.



6-5

Specific Time(s): Displays a Time Of Day list. You can add, edit, or delete entries from the listTo add a time, type a time of day into this field,then click the Add to List button. (uses 24 hourtime format)

To remove a time, select it from the list andclick Remove from List.To edit an entry already in the list, select andhighlight the entry then type in the change.

Interval: The time interval is the time that will pass between each occurrence of the activity. This optiondisplays a single field for making the entry.

Every:Type in the number of minutes to lapse betweentimes that the job should run.

6.2.3.1.3 Job History TabView historical records of each instance of a processed report. Each record includes details about howand when the job ran, including whether the job completed and time and date of status changes from start,running, completion, or failure.

Display panel: A row (with three columns for each) represents each time the report job has run.User: Displays the "owner" of the job at the time of processing. Ownership is granted to the C3C® userthat creates the job. Subsequent scheduled runs report creating user's ID in this column. If another useropens the job and clicks the Execute Now or Execute Delayed button, that instance of the job run willreport that user's ID in the User column. Any subsequent scheduled runs still report the creating user's ID.The exception is if a user edits the job and saves it. The editing user now becomes the owner of the job.



6-6

Job Status: Displays the last status for each time the job ran.Execute Date: Displays the date and times the job started to run.

Becomes active when you select a job instance from the display panel. Click to open the Job StatusDetails window and display the details for the selected job instance.

Refreshes display panel with job instances occurring since you opened the Job History panel.

6.2.3.1.3.1 Job Status DetailsShows the details for a selected job instance when you click on the System ScheduleBrowser's Job Monitor tab or the System Scheduler's Job History tab. The information in this windowdetermines the date and time for status changes. This window includes additional information used byTechnical Support to troubleshoot a report job.

READY TO START to WAITING FOR THREAD: The job has been recognized by C3C® and is waiting to bepicked up by the internal job service.

WAITING FOR THREAD to RUNNING: The job has been picked up by C3C's internal job service.

RUNNING to TERMINATING: The job has been terminated by a C3C® user clicking the Interrupt button.

TERMINATING to PROCESSED: The job has finished terminating and is no longer active.

Close the Job Status Details window and return to the window from which you opened it.



6-7

6.2.3.2 Sort CriteriaClick Sort on the Report Browser to open the Sort Criteria dialog box and indicate your sorting preferences forthe selected report.

The Sort Criteria window lists the report’s sortable columns in the Sort By panel. To arrange sort order, select acolumn header and click one of the Move Selection buttons. Choose a sort order in each column header by clickingthe Ascending or Descending check box. To not sort a report by a particular column, move that column from theSort By panel to the Available Columns panel by selecting the column header, then clicking the Remove button.

Button/Item DescriptionMoves selected report column header from Available Columns panel to Sort By panel.

Moves selected report column header from Sort By panel to Available Columns panel.

Marks a report column header in Sort By panel for Ascending or Descending order.

Moves selected report column header to higher sort order position in the Sort By panel.

Moves selected report column header to lower sort order position in the Sort By panel.

Click to save your sort selections. The dialog box closes and returns to Report Browser.When selected report is printed or viewed, sorting options will be invoked.Click this button to cancel your edits and return to the Report Browser.

6.3 Viewing and Printing ReportsSteps Description

1. Click on the Main menu. The Report Browser opens.

2. Click to expand the folder that matches the report type you want to view.3. Click on the desired report to select it. The Parameter Name and Parameter Value fields display.4. Click in the value field for each parameter and

enter/select filter options for the desired report.The default Output Format is PDF.

5. Click the button. Report processing starts. The Acrobat Reader programautomatically opens with the report in your web browser.

6. Click button on Acrobat Reader's toolbar. The standard Window's print dialog box displays.

7. Make any desired print settings and click OK. The print dialog box closes and print job is sent to printer.

6.4 Provisioning Report Parameters



6-8

6.4.1 Station ReportsParameters

Station Reports(All Switch Types)

ServiceProvider 1

Customer2

StationFolder Switch OE/LEN DN Output

Format 3Unique

Parameter(s)

Billable Features Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Call Forward DN Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Forward to Number• Call Forward Types

Call Forward Station Report✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Forward to Number

Directory Number / OfficeEquipment Report

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Directory Information Report✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

DN Removal Report✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 3 ✔

Feature Prompt Value Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Features Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Station Feature

Historical Station Report ✔ ✔ ✔ • Station ID 3

Subscriber Station HistoryReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Station ID

• Submit Date

Station Template Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Station Name

Subscriber Station Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• DN on Key 1Only 3

• Line Class Code• Target Date

Subscriber Station Report -Expert View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• DN on Key 1 Only 3

• Line Class Code• Target Date

Subscriber Station SummaryReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Line Class Code

1 Parameter does not display for a Service Provider type user since the value is automatically populated with the user'sassociated service reseller.2 Parameter does not display for a Customer type user since the value is automatically populated with the user's associatedcustomer.3 Parameter value is required before report can be generated. In some cases a default value is provided that is sufficient forrunning the report.



6-9

ParametersStation Reports

(All Switch Types)Service

Provider 1Customer

2StationFolder Switch OE/LEN DN Output

Format 3Unique

Parameter(s)

Switch SynchronizationReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Station ID• Process Date

Virtual DN Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Virtual DN

6.4.1.1 Station Reports - 5ESS SwitchParameters

Station Reports(5ESS Switch Type)

ServiceProvider 1 Customer 2 Station

Folder Switch OE/LEN DN OutputFormat 3 Unique Parameter(s)

Call Appearance Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Line Class Code Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Suspend Status Report ✔ ✔ 3 ✔ 3 ✔ 3 ✔ • Include SubfoldersSuspended DN ActivityReport ✔ ✔ 3 ✔ 3 ✔

• User• Interval

Suspended DN SummaryReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Lower DN Limit• Upper DN Limit

6.4.1.2 Station Reports – CS2000/DMS100 SwitchParameters

Station Reports(DMS Switch Type)

ServiceProvider 1

Customer2

StationFolder Switch OE/LEN DN Output

Format 3Unique

Parameter(s)

CICM Processed StationsReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Endpoint Identifier• Station ID• Processed After• Processed Before• Interval

Network Class of Service Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Customer Group6.4.1.3 Station Reports – EWSD Switch

ParametersStation Reports(EWSD) SwitchType

ServiceProvider

Customer StationFolder

Switch OE/LEN DN OutputFormat

UniqueParameter(s)

Line Class Code Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Line Class Code

6.4.2 Group Reports

6.4.2.1 Group Reports – 5ESS Switch

ParametersGroup Reports

(5ESS Switch Type)Service

Provider 1Customer

2StationFolder Switch OE/L

EN DN OutputFormat 3

UniqueParameter(s)

Authorization Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Auth Group• Auth Code

BRCS Feature Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ • BFG Name



6-10

ParametersGroup Reports

(5ESS Switch Type)Service

Provider 1Customer

2StationFolder Switch OE/L

EN DN OutputFormat 3

UniqueParameter(s)

BRCS Feature Group Usage Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • BFG Name

Call Pickup Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Group

Number

Configuration Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔• Configuration

GroupHunt Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Intercom Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Intercom

Group Name

Series Completion Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Series

CompletionNumber

Speed Calling Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Group Name• Group Type

6.4.2.2 Group Reports – CS2000/DMS100 SwitchParametersGroup Reports

(DMS Switch Type)Service

Provider 1 Customer 2 StationFolder Switch OE/LEN DN Output

Format 3Unique

Parameter(s)Authorization GroupReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Auth Group• Auth Code

Call Pickup GroupReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Group Intercom Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • GIC Group NameHunt Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Hunt Group Type

MADN Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• MADN Group

TypeSpeed Calling GroupReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

6.4.2.3 Group Reports EWSD SwitchParameters

Group Reports(EWSD Switch Type)


Folder Switch OE/LEN DN OutputFormat 3

UniqueParameter(s)

Authorization GroupReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Auth Group• Auth Code

Call Pickup Group Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Feature Key ManagementProfile Report

✔ ✔

6.4.3 Order Reports - All Switch TypesParameters

Order Reports(All Switch Types)


Folder Switch OE/LEN DN OutputFormat 3 Unique Parameter(s)

Available DirectoryNumber Report ✔ ✔ 3 ✔



6-11

ParametersOrder Reports

(All Switch Types)Service

Provider 1 Customer 2 StationFolder Switch OE/LEN DN Output

Format 3 Unique Parameter(s)

Detailed Order Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• User ID• Order ID• Customer Order

Number• Order Category• From Due Date• To Due Date

Failed Order StationReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Processed After• Processed Before

Order ProcessingSummary Report ✔ ✔ ✔

• From Due Date• To Due Date• Include Switch Sync

in Statistics

Pending Swap Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Begin Due Date• End Due Date

Performance Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• Completion Date

Begin• Completion Date End

Planned Station ChangesReport ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• Station ID• Effective After• Effective Before

Processed Swap Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

• User ID• Begin Completion

Date• End Completion Date

Station Processing Report ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔• User ID• Begin Date• End Date



6-12

6.5 Provisioning Report ExamplesEach Provisioning Report consists of:• A cover sheet displaying the report name and selection criteria. A sample cover sheet for a

provisioning report is shown in the following figure.

• One or more pages describing how your stations are set up. Detail pages have headers that caninclude general information such as Customer Name, Station Type, Switch Name, etc.

• A summary page that contains the following statistics about the report:

1. Number of pages in the report

2. Number of reported items (e.g., hunt groups or stations)

3. Time when the report completed

6.5.1 Station Report Examples

6.5.1.1 Station Reports - All Switch Types6.5.1.1.1 Billable Features Report

OSS generation must be enabled for the report to contain any add/move/change activities on billable features.



6-13

6.5.1.1.2 Call Forward DN ReportThe Call Forward DN Report provides information about all stations that meet the selection criteriaindicated in the parameters panel of the Report Browser. The report identifies stations that have callsforwarded to other stations. Information includes the primary directory number and OE for theforwarding station, the Call Forward type being used, and the DN to which the station is forwarded whenavailable. A sample report is shown in the following figure.



6-14

6.5.1.1.2.1 Call Forward DN Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaDirectory Number Forwarding station’s primary directory number.Office Equipment Forwarding station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LCC Forwarding station’sLine Card Forwarding station’s Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Call Forward Type The type of Call Forward feature that has been implemented on the forwarding station.Forwarded to DN The DN to which the station is forwarded

6.5.1.1.3 Call Forward Station ReportProvides information about all stations meeting the selection criteria in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser. The report identifies stations that have other stations forwarded to them. Information includesthe primary directory number and OE for the forwarded station, the Call Forward type being used, and theDN from the forwarding station. A sample report is shown in the following figure:



6-15

6.5.1.1.3.1 Call Forward Station Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaDirectory Number Forwarded to station’s primary directory number.Call Forward Type The type of Call Forward feature implemented on the forwarding station.Forwarded from DN The DN from the forwarded station

6.5.1.1.4 Directory Number / Office Equipment ReportLists the DN/OE pairs associated with the information you selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser. The report provides a high level view and count of the DNs and OEs in use for the Customerand/or Switch you indicate. A sample report is shown in the following figure:



6-16

6.5.1.1.4.1 Directory Number / Office Equipment Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the listed DN/OE pairs.Switch Name of the switch to which the listed DN/OE pairs are connected.Detail AreaDN Directory Number for each listed DN/OE pair.OE Office Equipment Number (or Line Equipment Number) for each listed DN/OE pair.Summary Statement Indicates how many DN/OE pairs were found for each Customer/Switch combination.

6.5.1.1.5 Directory Information ReportProvides information from General and Directory tabs on stations meeting criteria selected in theparameters panel of Report Browser, and provides a phonebook-type document for C3C® customers.



6-17

6.5.1.1.5.1 Directory Information Report DetailThe Name, Department, Location, and ID# fields are examples of data that can be entered into the fieldunder the Directory Information tab of the customer. The Directory Information is definable per customerand is not dependent on pre-defined values.

Field DescriptionParametersService Provider Service Provider for the customer who runs the report.

Customer Name of the customer “owning” the listed stations.

Switch Name of the switch to which the listed stations are associated.

Directory Number The Primary Directory Number for each listed station.

Locale Code C3C code for the region in which the report was run.

Time Zone Time Zone in which the report was run.

DetailsCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the listed stations.

Switch Name of the switch to which the listed stations are associated.

Directory Number The Primary Directory Number for each listed station.

Name A compilation of Last Name, First Name, and MI fields from Directory tab for each station. Data from allthree fields displays on a single line. If no data found, this field and label do not display.

Department Company department to which the employee belongs.

Location Data from Location field on General tab for each station. If no data found, field listed <unknown>.

ID# Customer’s employee ID

StatisticsCompletion Date Time and Date of report completion.

Number of Directory Entries The number of Directory Numbers used in the report.

Total Pages Printed Number of pages that the report printed.

6.5.1.1.6 DN Removal ReportProvides information about the station selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, andprepares you for disconnecting or suspending a station by showing stations with significant relationshipswith the selected station. The Station ID, DN, and the prompt bearing the reference to the selected stationare included for each relational station. A sample report is shown in the following figure:

6.5.1.1.6.1 DN Removal Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the referenced station (entered in Parameter panel).Switch Name of the switch to which the referenced station is connected.



6-18

Directory Number Referenced DN referenced by the listed stations.Detail AreaStation ID C3C® exclusive tracking number of the referencing station.Directory Number DN of the referencing station.Prompt Feature prompt on referencing station containing reference (for example CFBDN).Status Code Status of the referencing station, such as Active or Pending.

6.5.1.1.7 Features ReportProvides information about feature occurrences meeting the selection criteria in the Parameters panel of theReport Browser, and identifies features and the OE and Primary DN of the station on which they are found.

6.5.1.1.7.1 Features Report DetailMost of the items below provide a drop down list from which to select the parameters. In addition, the drop-downparameters provide additional information if you hover your mouse over the selection. The items with an asterisk *are required.

Field DescriptionService Provider Name of the Service ProviderCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).User Folder C3C® station folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch where the station(s) resides.Office Equipment Line equipment (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS) on station where featureDirectory Number Primary directory number for the station where the feature is located.Station Feature Name of the feature.Station Feature (Code/Description) A drop down list pre-populated with feature codes and corresponding descriptionsInclude in Data* Choose details, summary, or details and summaryOutput Format* Choose PDF or HTML

6.5.1.1.8 Feature Prompt Value ReportProvides information about feature occurrences meeting the selection criteria in the Parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, identifies features and the OE and Primary DN of the station on which they are found, and allows user to specifyfeature prompt values. The wildcard characters * and ? are supported for parameters on this report.



6-19

6.5.1.1.8.1 Feature Prompt Value Report DetailField DescriptionCustomer Name of the customer who owns the station(s)Switch Name of the switch on which the station residesFeature Name of feature assigned to keyProperty Description of particular setting for a feature (e.g., “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for promptTemplates Specifies whether or not templates are to be includedLocale Code Geographic region in which station is located. This field cannot be editedTime Zone Time zone in which station resides

6.5.1.1.9 Feature Limit ReportDepicts the features, the current count, and the limit for features assigned to specific customers.



6-20

6.5.1.1.9.1 Feature Limit Report detailField DescriptionService Provider Name of the Service ProviderCustomer Name of the customer who owns the station(s)Switch Name of the switch on which the station residesFeature Name of feature assigned to keyOutput Format* Choose PDF or HTML

6.5.1.1.10 Historical Station ReportThe Historical Station Report provides information about the station selected (by entering the C3C® Station ID)in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, including directory numbers, feature names, prompt names, andprompt values for all versions of the station recorded by C3C®. A sample report is shown in the following figure.



6-21

6.5.1.1.10.1 Historical Station Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station (includes version number).DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Detail AreaKey Key number for each button available on phone set.Feature Name of feature assigned to key.Prompt Description of particular setting for a feature (e.g., “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt in the preceding example).

6.5.1.1.11 Subscriber Station History ReportProvides information about the station(s) selected (by entering the C3C® Station ID) in the parameters panel ofthe Report Browser. The report shows edits on all versions of the station recorded by C3C®.



6-22

6.5.1.1.11.1 Subscriber Station History Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Detail AreaKey number Button number for each button available on phone set.Feature Name of feature assigned to Key.Prompt Description of particular setting for a feature (e.g., “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt in the preceding example).

6.5.1.1.12 Station Template Report



6-23

Provides information about templates meeting criteria you selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser.The report includes (but is not limited to) the feature names, prompt names, and prompt values for each station.

6.5.1.1.12.1 Station Template Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number. This will be <unknown> for templates.OE Station’s line equipment (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS) is “<unknown>” for templates.LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only) This will be <unknown> for templates.Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Detail AreaKey number Button number for each button available on phone set.Feature Name of feature assigned to Key.Prompt Description of particular setting for a feature (e.g., “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt in the preceding example).



6-24

6.5.1.1.13 Subscriber Station ReportProvides information about stations meeting criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser. Thereport includes DNs, feature names, prompt names, and prompt values for each station.

6.5.1.1.13.1 Subscriber Station Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C®.Detail AreaKey number Button number for each button available on phone set.Feature Name of feature assigned to key.Prompt Description of particular setting for a feature (e.g., “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt in the preceding example).



6-25

6.5.1.1.14 Subscriber Station Report - Expert ViewThe Subscriber Station Report provides information about stations meeting criteria selected in the parameterspanel of the Report Browser, including directory numbers, feature mnemonics, and prompt values for each station.This report is a condensed view of the same information provided in the Subscriber Station Report. Featuremnemonics display instead of the full names, and prompt values display without prompt descriptions.

6.5.1.1.14.1 Subscriber Station Report Expert View DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).Type Displays the actual station/model typeConfig Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Detail AreaKey number Button number for each button available on phone set.Feature Mnemonic for the feature assigned to Key.Prompt Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt).



6-26

6.5.1.1.15 Subscriber Station Summary ReportProvides information about stations meeting criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser,including only the general information usually found in the header area of other station reports: directorynumbers, OE, LCC, etc.

6.5.1.1.15.1 Subscriber Station Summary Report Detail



6-27

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaStation ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number.LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LTCLASS Line termination classification (displays for DMS only).LTID Line Termination ID (displays for DMS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (displays for DMS only)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)BFG Name Name of the BRCS Feature Group assigned to the station (displays for 5ESS onlY0Description Station description as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.Location Station location as recorded in C3C's Station Editor.

6.5.1.1.16 Switch Synchronization ReportProvides information about the station(s) selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showingedits resulting from running the Switch Sync or Line Verify jobs. The following figure shows a sample:

6.5.1.1.16.1 Switch Sync Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaStation ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station (includes version number).DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).LCC Station’s line class code. (phone set for DMS) (calling restriction code for 5ESS)Config Grp Name of the Configuration Group assigned to the station. (displays for 5ESS only)BFG Name Name of the BRCS Feature Group assigned to the station (displays for 5ESS only)Line Card Digital to Analog interface card used at the switch. (DMS only)Station Version The C3C® version number for station. (When a station is modified, the version increases by one.)Order ID The C3C® Order ID for the order that implemented the information received from Switch Sync.Submit Date The date that the station information received from Switch Sync was submitted to C3C®.Feature Changed / Name of feature that was added/changed/deleted and the affected key.Prompt Description of setting for feature (e.g. “Length of list” for feature Speed Call Long List).Value Value for prompt. (e.g., “L30” for “Length of list” prompt in the preceding example).



6-28

6.5.1.1.17 Virtual DN ReportLists virtual DNs and information about the stations where they are found. Virtual DNs on a DMS stationare DNs that never appear on key one. For 5ESS and EWSD stations, a virtual DN never appears as aPrimary DN. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.1.17.1 Virtual DN Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station where the listed Virtual DNs are located.Switch Name of the switch where the station housing the Virtual DN is connected.Detail AreaDN appears The telephone number that appears as a Virtual DN.Station ID C3C® tracking number for station bearing Virtual DN (includes core ID w/o version number).



6-29

Field DescriptionPrimary DN The telephone number that appears as the Primary DN on the station bearing the Virtual DN.Office Equipment The station's Office Equipment number where Virtual DN occurs.Office Equipment The station's Office Equipment number where Virtual DN occurs.Key Number The Key number where the Virtual DN appears on the station.Summary Statement A statement indicating how occurrences there are for each Virtual DN.

6.5.1.2 Station Reports - 5ESS Switch Type6.5.1.2.1 Call Appearance Report

Provides information about station(s) selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showing 5ESSstations where secondary call appearances occur. The OE number is provided for both primary and secondaryoccurrences of the telephone number.

6.5.1.2.1.1 Call Appearance Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Directory Number DN that is used in the Call Appearance.Detail AreaOffice Equipment Station's OE number where TN occurs. The primary occurrence is indicated with "<Primary> ".Key Key number on station where telephone number occurs.Appearance count The number of appearances that occur for the DN.

6.5.1.2.2 Line Class Code ReportLists class codes recorded in C3C® for Switch(s) selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser,showing the Line Class Code, the station types they can be used on, and a description of the terminatingand originating restrictions recorded for each code in C3C®. The following figure shows a sample report.



6-30

6.5.1.2.2.1 Line Class Code Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer to which the listed Line Class Codes belong.Switch Name of the switch for which the listed Line Class Codes have been recorded.Detail AreaLine Class Code The name or ID that has been recorded for each Line Class Code.Station Type The station type that has been recorded as compatible with listed Line Class Code.Orig. Description Restrictions for originating calls when a station uses the listed Line Class Code.Term. Description Restrictions for terminating calls when a station uses the listed Line Class Code.Summary Statement Indicates how many Line Class Codes were found for each Customer/Switch combination.

6.5.1.2.3 Suspend Status ReportProvides 5ESS Station Suspend counts for the Customer, Switch, and Folders selected in the Parameters panel ofthe Report Browser for both Suspended and Active stations. Decide whether you want subfolders to be included inthe counts. The Customer, Switch and Folder name(s) are provided with counts for each folder.

6.5.1.2.3.1 Suspend Status Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the referenced station folders.Switch Name of the switch to which the referenced stations are connected.



6-31

Detail AreaStation Folder Customer's Folder name and station count within folder.SUSO Suspend Origination Treatment (Yes/No)SUST Suspend Termination Treatment (Yes/No)Count Number of stations for each combination of treatments.Total Number of stations within the listed folder.6.5.1.2.4 Suspended DN Activity Report

Provides the user with details on selected stations either Suspended/Unsuspended over the selectedtimeframe. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.2.4.1 Suspended DN Activity Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Process Date Date the suspension activities were performed.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaDN Station’s primary directory numberStatus Current DN status6.5.1.2.5 Suspended DN Summary Report

Provides the user with a high level view of the Suspend Origination/Termination set for a selected rangeof stations. A sample report is shown in the following figure.



6-32

6.5.1.2.5.1 Suspended DN Summary Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaDN Station’s primary directory numberOE Operational EquipmentSuspend Originating Asterisk "*" indicates stations that have the Suspend Originating = YSuspend Terminating Asterisk "*" indicates stations that have the Suspend Originating = Y

6.5.1.3 Station Reports - DMS Switch Type

6.5.1.3.1 CICM Processed Stations ReportLists changes applied to stations within C3C®, and can be used by an Administrator to keep the CICMsynchronized with the CS2000 switch. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.3.1.1 CICM Processed Stations Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch on which the stations are located.Detail AreaStation ID C3C's internal tracking number for each station in the order.DN Primary directory number for each station.Action Type of action performed on each station in the order. (Activate, Modify, Disconnect)Endpoint Identifier Identifier of the endpoint for each station.Processed Date and time the order completed processing.(no label) Describes activity(ies) performed on station. For example, "Activate <feature> on Key <#>".Property Name of the prompt for the feature.Value Value of the prompt for the feature.



6-33

6.5.1.3.2 Network Class of Service ReportLists NCOS recorded for criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showing NCOSand a description of restrictions recorded for each code. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.3.2.1 Network Class of Service Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer for which the Network Class of Service (NCOS) has been recorded.Switch Name of the switch for which the listed NCOS has been recorded.Detail AreaCustomer Group The Customer Group name for which the listed NCOS has been recorded.Network Class of Service The name or ID that has been recorded for each NCOS.Description Describes the restrictions for stations using the listed NCOS.Summary Statement Shows how many NCOS found for each Customer/Switch/Customer Group combination.

6.5.1.4 Station Reports – CS2K Switch Type

6.5.1.4.1 CICM Processed Stations ReportLists changes applied to stations within C3C®, and can be used by an Administrator to keep the CICMsynchronized with the CS2000 switch. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.4.1.1 CICM Processed Stations Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader Area



6-34

Customer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch on which the stations are located.Detail AreaStation ID C3C's internal tracking number for each station in the order.DN Primary directory number for each station.Action Type of action performed on each station in the order. (Activate, Modify, Disconnect)Endpoint Identifier Identifier of the endpoint for each station.Processed Date and time the order completed processing.(no label) Describes activity(ies) performed on station. For example, "Activate <feature> on Key <#>".Property Name of the prompt for the feature.Value Value of the prompt for the feature.

6.5.1.4.2 Network Class of Service ReportLists NCOS recorded for criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showing NCOSand a description of restrictions recorded for each code. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.1.4.2.1 Network Class of Service Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer for which the Network Class of Service (NCOS) has been recorded.Switch Name of the switch for which the listed NCOS has been recorded.Detail AreaCustomer Group The Customer Group name for which the listed NCOS has been recorded.Network Class of Service The name or ID that has been recorded for each NCOS.Description Describes the restrictions for stations using the listed NCOS.Summary Statement Shows how many NCOS found for each Customer/Switch/Customer Group combination.

6.5.1.5 EWSD Station Reports

6.5.1.5.1 Line Class Code ReportProvides information on Line Class Codes, which give stations specific functionality as defined on a switch.



6-35

6.5.1.5.1.1 Line Class Code Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer who owns the station(s)Switch Name of the switch on which the station residesService Provider Name of Service ProviderLine Class Code Value for promptStation TypeLocale Code C3C code for region in which the report was run.Time Zone Time zone in which station resides

6.5.2 Group Report Examples

6.5.2.1 Group Reports - 5ESS Switch Type6.5.2.1.1 Authorization Group ReportProvides information on each of the Auth Code groups matching the criteria selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, displaying the authorization codes for each group, and MFCOS and AFCOS assignments for each code.

6.5.2.1.1.1 Authorization Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer to which the listed Authorization Codes belongSwitch Name of the switch where the Authorization Group residesAuthorization Group Authorization Group NameLength Number of digits in authorization codes for authorization groupDetail AreaCode Authorization Code (maximum of 15 digits)MFCOS Main Feature Class of Service restriction levelAFCOS Alternate Feature Class of Service restriction levelDescription Description of Authorization CodeSummary Statement Indicates how many Authorization Codes were found for each Authorization Group6.5.2.1.2 BRCS Feature Group Report



6-36

Lists features and prompt values included in the BFG selected in the Parameters panel of the ReportBrowser. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.1.2.1 BRCS Feature Group Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaBFG Name BRCS Feature Group NameSwitch Name of the switch where the BRCS Feature Group resides.Detail AreaFeature Features Associated with the BRCS Feature GroupPrompt Associated Features Prompts.Value Feature Prompt ValuesSummary Statement Indicates how many features were included in each BFG6.5.2.1.3 BRCS Feature Group Usage Report

Lists stations assigned the BFG selected in the Parameters panel of the Report Browser. Specify a switchand/or customer to get a report of stations using a BFG, and which BFG they are assigned.

6.5.2.1.3.1 BRCS Feature Group Usage Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the Stations with the BRCS Feature Group resides.Detail AreaGroup Name BRCS Feature Group Name.Station ID Tracking number for station with BRCS Feature Group assigned. (includes core ID w/ version #).Directory Number Primary DN for each station listed.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each station.



6-37

Summary Statement A count for the number of stations that have the listed BFG assigned.6.5.2.1.4 Call Pickup Group Report

Provides information on each of the CPU groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, showing LEN/OE and DN for each member and whether the group is an originating orterminating group. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.1.4.1 Call Pickup Group Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaCall Pickup Group Name of the Call Pickup Group and whether it is an originating or terminating group type.Directory Number Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.6.5.2.1.5 Configuration Group Report

Lists features included in the configuration group selected in the Parameters panel of the Report Browser.A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.1.5.1 Configuration Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaConfig Name Configuration Group NameSwitch Name of the switch where the Configuration Group resides.Detail AreaKey Number of the key on the station where the feature is located



6-38

Feature Feature associated with the Configuration GroupFeature Description English description of the feature6.5.2.1.6 Hunt Group Report

Provides information on each multiline hunt group (MLHG) matching criteria you selected, and keynumbers for each group member. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.1.6.1 Hunt Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch to which the station(s) is connected.Group Type Multiline Hunt GroupMLH Group Group NumberDetail Area

Directory Number Directory number for each member station. The pilot member station is indicated with the"Primary >" tag in front of the Directory Number.

Office Equipment Office Equipment (OE) number for each member station.Key Number of the key on the member station.Summary Statement A count for the number of stations that are in the multi line hunt group..6.5.2.1.7 Intercom Group Report

Lists stations part of group selected in the Parameters panel of the Report Browser. The DN, OE, Auto-Dial and/or Position are provided for each member. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.1.7.1 Intercom Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaGroup Name Name of the Intercom GroupDirectory Number Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Auto Dial Position For each member, if the feature is marked for Auto - Stored Digits, the position choice is listed.Position For each member, if the feature is marked for Dial - Dialed Digits, the position choice is listed.



6-39

Summary Statement Indicates how many members are in the group.6.5.2.1.8 Series Completion ReportThe Series Completion Report provides series hunt completion details for the selected criteria you indicate in theparameters panel of the Report Browser. The report shows the DN and OE of the Series completed to and from numbers.

6.5.2.1.8.1 Series Completion Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Station Folder C3C® folder in which the pilot member resides.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each station that matches your selections in the Report Parameters panel.OE OE number for stations matching your selections in the Report Parameters panel.Series Completes From Numbers Primary DNs for completed stations matching selections in Report Parameters.Series Complete To Number Indicates Primary DNs for stations matching selections in Report Parameters panel.

6.5.2.1.9 Speed Calling Group ReportProvides information on the 5ESS SC groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser,showing the Group Name, if the group is one or two digits, and the DN and OE for the Controlling Station and members.

6.5.2.1.9.1 Speed Calling Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.



6-40

Detail AreaSpeed Call Group Name of the Speed Call Group and whether it is 1-digit or 2-digit group type.Directory Number Primary DN for each member station; controlling station indicated by “Controller >" in front of DN.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.

6.5.2.2 Group Reports - DMS Switch Type

6.5.2.2.1 Authorization Group ReportProvides information on the each of the Authorization Groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, and displays the authorization codes for each group and the restriction levels for each code.


Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer to which the listed Authorization Codes belongSwitch Name of the switch where the Authorization Group residesAuthorization Group Authorization Group NameLength Number of digits in authorization codes for authorization groupDetail AreaCode Authorization Code (maximum of 15 digits)Type Type of restriction levelNCOS Network class of service restriction levelDescription Description of Authorization CodeSummary Statement Indicates how many Authorization Codes were found for each Authorization Group6.5.2.2.2 Call Pickup Group ReportProvides information on teach of the DMS100 CPU groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, showing each LEN/OE that links the members and the DN and OE for each member.

6.5.2.2.2.1 Call Pickup Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.



6-41

LEN of Group Station's Line Equipment Number (LEN) that links the CPU Group together.Detail AreaMember Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on member station where CPU group occurs.Number of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.2.3 Group Intercom ReportProvides information on each of the DMS100 GIC groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, showing the GIC Name along with the DN, OE, and member number for each member.

6.5.2.2.3.1 Group Intercom Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Station Folder C3C® folder where the first group member that was created resides.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaDirectory Number Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on each member station where the GIC feature is assigned.Member Number GIC member number for each member.Number of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.6.5.2.2.4 Hunt Group Report

Provides information on the DMS hunt group types matching criteria selected in the parameter panel ofthe Report Browser, showing the common attributes of the group, and listing the applicable DN, OE, andkey numbers. The following figure shows sample report for a Directory Number Hunt (DNH) group.



6-42

A sample report for a Multiline Hunt (MLH) group is shown in the following figure.

A sample report for a Distributed Line Hunt (DLH) group is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.2.4.1 Hunt Group ReportField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch to which the station(s) is connected.Group Type Directory Number Hunt, Distributed Line Hunt, or Multiline HuntCustomer Group Customer Group to which stations belong. Applied to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Pilot DN Directory number of the Pilot of the groupLATA Name LATA Name of Pilot station. Only applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Line Treatment Group Line Treatment Group of Pilot station. Applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.NCOS Network Class of Service for Pilot station. Applied to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Ringing Ringing option for Pilot station. Only applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Customer Subgroup Customer Subgroup of Pilot station. Applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station (Pilot member station indicated with "Primary>" tag in front of DN)Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on member station where telephone number occurs.

6.5.2.2.5 MADN Group Report



6-43

The Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group (MADN) Report provides information on the each of the DMS100MADN groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showing the MADN type, DN,and OE of the pilot, and the OE for all remaining members.

6.5.2.2.5.1 Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Directory Number Primary DN for pilot station.MADN Group Type Type of MADN group being reported.Bridging Specifies whether or not the MADN group has the bridging capability.Conference Size Conference bridge size indicating the number of parties that can bridge into a MADN call.Denial Treatment Audible treatment given to a MADN member for denied access to a call.Group Status Initial status of a MDN call.Release Type Privacy release mode for the MADN group.Bridging Tone Indicates whether or not a tone is heard when a MADN number bridges into a call.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station (Pilot member station indicated by "Primary>" tag before DN).Office Equipment OE number for each member station (Pilot station indicated by "Primary> " tag before OE).Key Key number on each member station where the MADN feature is assigned.Number of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.2.6 Speed Call Group ReportProvides information on the DMS100 SC groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, showing the DN and OE of the pilot and members.



6-44

6.5.2.2.6.1 Speed Call Group ReportField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.CONTLEN Line Equipment Number (LEN) for the pilot station.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station.Office Equipment OE number for each member station; pilot station indicated with "Pilot >" tag in front of OE.Key Key number on each member station where the SC feature is assigned.Number of Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.3 Group Reports – CS2K Switch Type

6.5.2.3.1 Authorization Group ReportProvides information on the each of the Authorization Groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, and displays the authorization codes for each group and the restriction levels for each code.


Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer to which the listed Authorization Codes belongSwitch Name of the switch where the Authorization Group residesAuthorization Group Authorization Group NameLength Number of digits in authorization codes for authorization groupDetail AreaCode Authorization Code (maximum of 15 digits)Type Type of restriction levelNCOS Network class of service restriction levelDescription Description of Authorization CodeSummary Statement Indicates how many Authorization Codes were found for each Authorization Group

6.5.2.3.2 Call Pickup Group ReportProvides information on each of the CS2K CPU groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, showing each LEN/OE that links the members and the DN and OE for each member.



6-45

6.5.2.3.2.1 Call Pickup Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.LEN of Group Station's Line Equipment Number (LEN) that links the CPU Group together.Detail AreaMember Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on member station where CPU group occurs.Number of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.3.3 Group Intercom ReportProvides information on each of the CS2K GIC groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the ReportBrowser, showing the GIC Name along with the DN, OE, and member number for each member.

6.5.2.3.3.1 Group Intercom Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Station Folder C3C® folder where the first group member that was created resides.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaDirectory Number Primary DN for each member station.Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on each member station where the GIC feature is assigned.Member Number GIC member number for each member.Number of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.3.4 Hunt Group Report



6-46

Provides information on the CS2K hunt group types matching criteria selected in the parameter panel ofthe Report Browser, showing the common attributes of the group, and listing the applicable DN, OE, andkey numbers. The following figure shows sample report for a Directory Number Hunt (DNH) group.

A sample report for a Multiline Hunt (MLH) group is shown in the following figure.

A sample report for a Distributed Line Hunt (DLH) group is shown in the following figure.

6.5.2.3.4.1 Hunt Group Report

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).



6-47

Field DescriptionSwitch Name of the switch to which the station(s) is connected.Group Type Directory Number Hunt, Distributed Line Hunt, or Multiline HuntCustomer Group Customer Group to which stations belong. Applied to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Pilot DN Directory number of the Pilot of the groupLATA Name LATA Name of Pilot station. Only applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Line Treatment Group Line Treatment Group of Pilot station. Applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.NCOS Network Class of Service for Pilot station. Applied to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Ringing Ringing option for Pilot station. Only applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Customer Subgroup Customer Subgroup of Pilot station. Applicable to Distributed Line Hunt and Multiline Hunt Groups.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station (Pilot member station indicated with "Primary>" tag in front of DN)Office Equipment Office Equipment number for each member station.Key Key number on member station where telephone number occurs.

6.5.2.3.5 MADN Group ReportThe Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group (MADN) Report provides information on the each of the CS2KMADN groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showing the MADN type, DN,and OE of the pilot, and the OE for all remaining members.

6.5.2.3.5.1 Multiple Appearance Directory Number Group Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Directory Number Primary DN for pilot station.MADN Group Type Type of MADN group being reported.Bridging Specifies whether or not the MADN group has the bridging capability.Conference Size Conference bridge size indicating the number of parties that can bridge into a MADN call.Denial Treatment Audible treatment given to a MADN member for denied access to a call.Group Status Initial status of a MDN call.Release Type Privacy release mode for the MADN group.Bridging Tone Indicates whether or not a tone is heard when a MADN number bridges into a call.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station (Pilot member station indicated by "Primary>" tag before DN).Office Equipment OE number for each member station (Pilot station indicated by "Primary> " tag before OE).Key Key number on each member station where the MADN feature is assigned.



6-48

Field DescriptionNumber of Members Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.3.6 Speed Call Group ReportProvides information on the CS2K SC groups matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, showing the DN and OE of the pilot and members.

6.5.2.3.6.1 Speed Call Group ReportField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.CONTLEN Line Equipment Number (LEN) for the pilot station.Detail AreaDirectory Number DN for each member station.Office Equipment OE number for each member station; pilot station indicated with "Pilot >" tag in front of OE.Key Key number on each member station where the SC feature is assigned.Number ofMembers Indicates how many members are in the group.

6.5.2.4 EWSD Group Reports6.5.2.4.1 Authorization Group ReportProvides information on authorization groups, which limit accessibility to switch resources, typically Long Distance.

Field DescriptionHeader AreaService Provider Name of the Service ProviderCustomer Name of the CustomerSwitch Name of the Switch



6-49

Auth Group Name of Auth GroupAuth Code Authorization CodeLocale Code Geographic region in which station is located. This fieldTime Zone Time Zone in which station is locatedDetail Area

6.5.2.4.2 Call Pickup Group ReportProvides information on call pickup groups, which allow stations within a group to pick up a call if any of the stations ring.

Field DescriptionHeader AreaService Provider Name of Service ProviderCustomer Name of CustomerSwitch Name of SwitchGroup Number Number of GroupLocale Code Geographic region in which station is located. ThisTime Zone Name of Time Zone in which Group residesDetail Area

6.5.2.4.3 Feature Key Management Profile ReportSimilar to a 5ESS Config Group, provides information on feature key management profiles, which can put a group offeatures on a station using predefined switch information.

Field DescriptionHeader AreaService Provider Name of Service ProviderSwitch Name of SwitchConfig Group Name of Configuration Group



6-50

Locale Code Geographic region in which station is located. This fieldTime Zone Name of Time Zone in which Group residesDetail Area

6.5.2.4.4 Series Completion ReportThis report displays series hunt completion information for EWSD stations.

Field DescriptionService Provider Name of Service ProviderCustomer Name of CustomerUser Folder The folder from which the report data is runSwitch Name of SwitchSeries Completion Number Manually enter the Series Completion NumberOutput Format File format of the output

6.5.2.4.5 Speed Calling Group ReportThis report displays speed calling group information for EWSD stations.



6-51

Field DescriptionService Provider Name of Service ProviderCustomer Name of CustomerSwitch Name of SwitchGroup Type Type of Speed Call Group (i.e. spd8 or spd30)Output Format File format of the output

6.5.3 Order Report Examples

6.5.3.1 Available Directory Number ReportThe Available Directory Number Report provides a list of unassigned directory numbers for a customer.

Available Directory Number Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the directory numbers.Detail AreaDirectory Number Individual or range of directory numbers available to be used/assigned for the customer.

6.5.3.2 Detailed Order ReportProvides information on orders matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser,showing each order's description, status, processing time, processing options, etc., and detailedinformation on the changes (activate MLH on key 4). A sample report is shown in the following figure.



6-52

Detailed Order Report DetailField Description

Header AreaOrder ID C3C's order tracking number.Customer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Description Text from the Description field on the Order Editor.Order Status Status of the order. (On Hold, Processed, etc.)Business Status Whether the order has been Finalized or not.Cust Order ID Text from the Customer Order ID field on the Order Editor.Due Date/Time Date and time the order is (was) scheduled for processing.Processing Date/Time Date and time the order began processing.Completion Date/Time Date and time the order completed processing.Detail AreaAction Type of action performed on each station in the order. (Activate, Modify, Disconnect)Details Information of actions performed on station (i.e. Activate NAME feature on key 1).Status Status of each station's actions. (Finished, Unready, Ready)Station ID C3C's internal tracking number for each station in the order.Station DN Primary DN for each station.Station OE Office Equipment number for each station.Description Text from the Description field on the Station Editor for each station.Processing Options Selected for order (i.e. Automatically Finalize) on Processing Options tab of Order Editor.History (last 5 days) Shows entries found on History tab of Order Editor. (creation date, modified date, etc.)

6.5.3.3 Failed Order Station ReportProvides information on orders that failed to process successfully, showing the directory and equipmentnumbers for each failed station of an order, and the error messages provided by the switch.



6-53

Failed Order Station Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Switch Name of the switch that processed the stations.Detail AreaOrder ID C3C's order tracking number.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.DN Station’s primary directory number.OE Station’s line equipment number (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS).Message Error messages provided by switch indicate the reason for the failure of the station in the order.

6.5.3.4 Order Processing Summary ReportProvides information on orders matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser, showingthe number of orders in each status category (Ready, Running, Unready, Processed). These counts are providedseparately in the specified range for each customer for each day selected in the parameters panel.

Order Processing Summary Report Detail



6-54

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the group.Detail AreaDates Indicates a date for each day within the specified report date range.Status Categories are Ready, Unready, Running and Processed.Number of Orders Indicates how many orders are in each category for each date.Category Totals Indicates how many orders are in each category for all dates.Date Totals Indicates how many orders are in each date for all status categories.

6.5.3.5 Pending Swap ReportProvides information on each of swap order matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser, showing the DN and the original and pending LEN/OE assignment for each stationinvolved in the swap. The order ID and scheduled date are also provided.

Pending Swap Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the order(s).Switch Name of the switch where the group resides.Detail AreaOrder ID C3C's order tracking number.Due Date Date and time the order is scheduled for processing.DN Primary DN for each station in the swap order.Current OE The current Office Equipment or LEN for each station in the swap order.Future OE The future Office Equipment or LEN for each station in the swap order.Messages This field only displays if there are messages associated with the swap order.

6.5.3.6 Performance ReportProvides information on system release and response times, by switch and user ID, matching criteriaselected in the parameters panel of the Report Browser. There are three areas within the PerformanceReport: Execution Times (first figure), Station Executions, and Station Verifies.



6-55

The figure below shows a sample of Station Verifies.



6-56

The figure below shows a sample of Station Executions.

6.5.3.6.1.1 Performance Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the stations in the order(s).User ID Identifier of the user who performed the station activity.Detail Area - Execution TimesSwitch Name of the switch where the station executions took place.Execution Delay Number of seconds of delay for processing stations on the switch.Execution Time Number of seconds for processing stations on the switch.Stations Included: Number of stations included in the processing statistics for the switch.Swaps Included Number of station swap activities included in processing statistics for the switch.Average Delay Average number of seconds of delay for processing stations on the switch.Average Process Time Average number of seconds for processing each station on the switch.Totals (User ID) Indicates totals for above processing execution time categories for each User ID.Totals (Customer) Indicates totals for above processing execution time categories for each Customer.Detail Area - Station ExecutionsSwitch Name of the switch where the station executions took place.Changes Number of station changes to be executed on the switch.Accepted Number of station executions accepted for processing on the switch.Rejected Number of station executions rejected for processing on the switch.Percent Accepted Percentage of station executions accepted for processing on the switch.Percent Rejected Percentage of station executions rejected for processing on the switch. Always zero.Totals (User ID) Indicates the totals for the above station execution categories for each User ID.Totals (Customer) Indicates the totals for the above station execution categories for each Customer.



6-57

Field DescriptionDetail Area - Station VerifiesSwitch Name of the switch where the station activities took place.Changes Number of station verifies to be executed on the switch.Accepted Number of station verifies accepted for processing on the switch.Rejected Number of station verifies rejected for processing on the switch.Percent Accepted Percentage of station verifies accepted for processing on the switch.Percent Rejected Percentage of station verifies rejected for processing on the switch.Totals (User ID) Indicates the totals for the above station verify categories for each User ID.Totals (Customer) Indicates the totals for the above station verify categories for each Customer.

6.5.3.7 Planned Station Changes ReportProvides information on changes planned for stations matching criteria selected in the parameters panelof the Report Browser. The wildcard characters * or ? are supported for the DN and Station IDparameters on this report. A sample report is shown in the following figure.

6.5.3.7.1.1 Planned Station Changes Report Detail

Field DescriptionHeader AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Station Folder C3C® folder in which the station resides.Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.Detail AreaPlanned Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station with planned changes.DN Primary directory number of the planned station.Planned Active Date: Date and time the station is scheduled for processing.OE Line equipment (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS) of the station with planned changes.Change Description of the change planned for the station (e.g., Change OE).

6.5.3.8 Processed Swap ReportProvides information on station swap activities matching criteria selected in the parameters panel of theReport Browser. A sample report is shown in the following figure.



6-58

6.5.3.8.1.1 Processed Swap Report DetailField Description

Header AreaService Provider Name of the Service ProviderCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch to which the station is connected.User User NameBegin Date Start of ReportEnd Date End of ReportLocale Code System designated code for locationTime Zone Standard time zoneSwaps Processed On Date on which swap activities were performed.Detail AreaUser Name Identifier of the user who performed the station swaps.Order ID C3C's order tracking number.DN Primary directory number of the swapped station.New OE New Line equipment (DMS) or office equipment number (5ESS) of station which was swapped.

6.5.3.9 Station Processing ReportProvides information on station processing activities matching criteria selected in the parameters panel ofthe Report Browser. The report provides an overview of the activities on a station.



6-59

6.5.3.9.1.1 Station Processing Report DetailField Description

Header AreaCustomer Name of the customer “owning” the station(s).Switch Name of the switch on which the stations are located.Process Date Date when the station processing activities were performed.Detail AreaStations Processed By Descriptive name of the user who performed the station processing activities.Directory Number Primary directory number of the station.Station ID C3C® exclusive tracking number for the station.Station Version C3C® version number for station. When a station is modified, the version increases by one.Activity Summary of the station processing activity for the version (e.g., Deactivated 3 features).



7-1

7 Appendix – 5ESS Station Features List/ACBC (Code/Button) The /ACBC feature (also referred to as Ring Again) lets a caller camp-on to a busy station. When a calling partyreceives busy treatment, the caller (Analog/ISDN) can signal for a dial tone and dial a feature use dial code (ISDN only) or press afeature button to request automatic callback. /ACBC is a terminal feature and is Code/Button assignable.ARAD (Code) For a customer having the Deluxe ARS feature to deactivate the use of ARS for a single call, the /ARAD feature isassigned. The /ARAD feature is assigned when a customer wants to dial a code to use the ARS feature.ARC (Code) For a customer to receive the ARS feature, either the /ARC or the /ARA feature must be assigned. The /ARC feature uses adialed code to use ARS routing. The /ARA feature uses ARS routing for all trunk calls. The line/trunk parameter data for the /ARC or the/ARA features must specify the name of the ARS group defined for the Centrex. The other parameter options are not applicable to the/ARC or the /ARA features, therefore, the default values assigned cannot be modified./ATHCDE (Code/Button) The 1A ESS™ switch equivalent of ATH with no customer control. Typically utilized for Electronic TandemSwitch Authorization codes. The Authorization Code (ATH) feature lets a customer define sets of both feature and facility dialingprivileges, to associate an authorization code with each set, and to use these authorization codes to restrict the dialing privileges toauthorized personnel in the context of the authorization code group. Authorization Code is Code/Button assignable.BFGN BFG eliminates data redundancies by providing a pool of data that can be shared by a large quantity of lines that have similarsubsets of BRCS features.CFBLAC (None, ISDN/Analog) Automatically invoked; when the feature is assigned to a line, the “forward-to” DN must be specified,and the feature cannot be turned off by either a button or a dialed code. Assigned to either analog or ISDN.CFBLFB (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog, CFG Grp) Operates the same as CFBLAC. Calls are forwarded when all appearances of lineare busy. The forward-to DN can be changed by dial code, and must be set up in the dialplan. When assigning /CFBLFB as a globalfeature to the line, assign the forward-to DN. Assign /CFBLFB as a feature and BNTOG as an action to the CFG Grp applied to the line.CFBLIO (None) Call Forwarding Busy Line Incoming Only. Forwards CSD calls terminating to the dialed DN from outside theterminal group.CFBLITG (None, ISDN/Analog) Call Forwarding Busy Line Intraterminal Group. Forwards calls originating from inside the terminalgroup to busy lines within the group. Lets the forward-to DN be a number outside the terminal group. Assign to Analog and ISDN lines.CFDAAC (None, ISDN/Analog) Automatically invoked once applied to the line, it cannot be turned off by either a button or a dialedcode. Can be assigned to either analog or ISDN. Specify the forward-to DN. Assign /CFDAAC as a global feature to the line, assign theforward-to DN, and determine the time to wait for an answer before forwarding the call.CFDACW Call Forwarding Don’t Answer Call Waiting: Forwards CW call to a pre-determined DN or messaging system.CFDAFB (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog, CFG Grp) Similar to CFBLFB, it can be applied to either ISDN or analog. It only works fromthe primary DN when used on the feature button. Calls will be forwarded when the primary DN is idle and does not answer. Enter theforward-to DN into the switch when the feature is applied. The forward-to DN can be changed by dial code if it is set up in the dialplan.Assign /CFDAFB as a global feature to the line, assign the forward-to DN, and determine the time to wait for an answer beforeforwarding the line. Assign /CFDAFB as a feature and BNTOG as an action to the CFG Grp applied to the line. CFDAIO (None) TheCall Forwarding Don't Answer Incoming Only (CFDAIO) feature is a modification of the CFDA feature in that CFDAIO feature onlyforwards calls terminating to the dialed DN from outside the terminal group. Intraterminal group calls continue to ring the idle DN as ifthe called DN had no call forwarding. When the CFDAIO Only feature is assigned to a Position DN, all calls to the position from outsidethe terminal group, except ACD hunted Calls, are forwarded after a specified number of seconds. CFDAITG (None) Call ForwardingDon't Answer Intra-Terminal Group. Forwards only those calls originating from inside the terminal group when the called line is idle.This feature is primarily used for the Dual Telephone Coverage Feature.CFDIAG (None) Call Forwarding Within Group. Forwards calls from in a terminal group to another DN in terminal group.CFIAG: Call Forwarding In A Group. Forwards calls in or out of the terminal group to a DN in the terminal group.CFIBL (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding Busy Line (Circuit-Switched Voice): This pre-constructed feature lets a CSV callbe forwarded to a remote DN when the base switch determines that the interface is busy or unable to accept another CSV call.Code/Button assignable. Assignable to ISDN Voice lines only.CFIDA (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding Don't Answer (Circuit-Switched Voice): This feature lets a CSV call beforwarded to the remote DN when the offered call is not answered after a specified period of time. The time is specified by the CFDATIMEOUT parameter. Code/Button assignable. Assignable to ISDN voice lines only.

CFIDA (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding Don't Answer (Circuit-Switched Data): This feature lets a CSD call be forwardedto the remote DN when the offered call is not answered after a specified period of time. The time is specified by the CFDA TIMEOUTparameter. Code/Button assignable. Assignable to ISDN data lines only.CFDIDDA (Button/Code) National ISDN Call Forwarding Don't Answer (Circuit Switched Data). Lets a CSD call be forwarded to theremote DN when the offered call is not answered after a period of time specified by the CFDA TIMEOUT parameter.CFIDV: National ISDN Call Forwarding All Calls (Circuit-Switched Data). Lets a CSD call be forwarded to a remote DN regardless ofthe busy/idle status of the interface associated with the base DN.CFIO (Code) The Call Forwarding Incoming Only (CFIO) feature modifies CFV so that the activated call forwarding function appliesonly to calls originated from outside the terminal group. Intraterminal group terminations are not affected by the activation of CFIO.



7-2

When CFIO is assigned to a Position DN, all calls to the position from outside the terminal group, except ACD hunted calls, areforwarded when CFIO is active.CFIPF: Call Forwarding Over Private Facilities for National ISDN-3. Lets National ISDN circuit-switched voice (CSV) calls beforwarded to an on- or off-network directory number (DN) over private facilities. Private facilities may include Foreign Exchange (FX)lines, Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS), Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA), or senderized tie trunk facilities.CFIV (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding All Calls (Circuit-Switched Voice): This pre-constructed feature lets a CSV call beforwarded to a remote DN regardless of the busy/idle status of the interface associated with the base DN. The activation type used isCDDN, (Customer Dialed DN). Code/Button assignable. Assignable to ISDN voice lines only.CFIVC (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding All Calls. No Answer of Courtesy Call Required: This pre-constructed featurelets a CSV call be forwarded to a remote DN regardless of the busy/idle status of the interface associated with the base DN. Theactivation type used is CDDNC (Customer Dialed Directory Number Completed). Code/Button assignable to ISDN voice lines only.CFIVCA (Button/Code, ISDN) ISDN Call Forwarding All Calls Answer of Courtesy Call Required: This pre-constructed feature lets aCSV call be forwarded to a remote DN regardless of the busy/idle status of the interface associated with the base DN. The activation typeused is CDDNCA, (Customer Dialed DN with Courtesy Call Answer Required). Code/Button assignable to ISDN voice lines only.CFPF (Code) The Call Forwarding Over Private Facilities feature lets 5ESS®-2000 switch business customers forward calls over publicand private facilities, which may be accessed via PFA or ARS. When CFPF is assigned to the Position DN and is activated, all calls tothe position, except the ACD hunted calls, are forwarded using the private facility specified in the activation procedure.CFPFFB: Call Forwarding Over Private Facilities Feature Button. Lets National ISDN circuit-switched voice (CSV) calls be forwardedto an on- or off-network directory number (DN) over private facilities. Private facilities may include Foreign Exchange (FX) lines, WideArea Telephone Service (WATS), Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA), or senderized tie trunk facilities.CFV (Code, ISDN/Analog) A dial-code activated and deactivated feature, that can be assigned to both analog and ISDN. Assign it to theline as inactive (N for active), and enter the forward-to DN each time that the code is dialed to activate the feature. CFV takes precedenceover any other call-forwarding feature. Assign /CFV as a global feature on the line.CFV1A: Call Forwarding Variable All Calls. Lets telephone users selectively forward calls arriving at their station sets to multiplemessage service centers (answering or call coverage points).CFVFB (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog, CFG Grp) Forwards calls to the DN when the feature button is activated. Enter the forward-toDN when the feature is applied, because the feature button activates and deactivates the feature without having to enter the forward-toDN each time. The feature CFVFB must be added as a global feature to the DN, along with the forward-to DN, and the feature CFVFBmust be added to the CFG Grp that will be applied to the line. The forward-to DN may be changed by dial code. That would have to beset up in the dialplan. The forward-to DN may be the same or different as for any other call-forwarding feature. Assign /CFVFB as afeature to the DN along with the forward-to DN and assign /CFVFB as a feature and BNTOG as an action that will be applied to the line.CFVITG (Button) The Call Forwarding Internal to Terminal Group features (/CFVITG, /CFBLITG, and /CFDAITG) are functionallyopposite to the Call Forwarding Incoming Only features (/CFIO, /CFBLIO, and the /CFDAIO features, respectively). The CallForwarding Internal To Terminal Group features forward only those calls originating from inside the terminal group, whereas the CallForwarding Incoming Only features forward only those calls originating from outside the terminal group. In addition, the CallForwarding Internal To Terminal Group features allow the forward-to DN to be a number outside the terminal group, whereas the CallForwarding In A (within or intraterminal) group feature (/CFIAG) only lets the forward-to DN be a number in the terminal group./COT1 (Code/Button) The Local Area Signaling Services Customer-Originated Trace feature lets an end-user trace the last incomingcall by dialing an access code or pressing the feature button. The call trace is delivered over a data link to an authorized agency after thecustomer invokes COT. Assignable to either Analog or DSL/ISDN stations. Code/Feature Button AssignableCPANSBK (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) Call Park Answer Back is a pre-constructed feature of the "Call Park" class of features. CallPark Answer Back of a parked call lets a user answer back a call from any DN within the same terminal group. It is assignable toAnalog/ISDN lines and is a Code/Button assignable feature./CPBDNT: Lets any line in same terminal group that does not have a DPN blocking feature (/CPBDNT) to be answered.CPBPARK (Button/Code) The 5ESS® -2000 switch must place the call on soft-hold and return dial tone to the user after receipt of aflash. An applicable Multiway feature must be assigned to the line and Multiway filtering checks must pass in order for the 5ESS® -2000switch to correctly recognize the flash.For analog lines, when the 5ESS® -2000 switch receives a Basic Call Park access code, a confirmation tone is followed by silence. The5ESS® -2000 switch then takes the far party off soft-hold and parks the call against the DN making the Basic Call Park request. Afterreceipt of the flash, if the 5ESS® -2000 switch does not receive a call park access code, then the current 5ESS® -2000 switch (Multiway)operation applies.For ISDN lines, the 5ESS® -2000 switch invokes Basic Call Park via a feature button. The terminal sends an INFORMATION messageto the 5ESS® -2000 switch indicating that the call should be parked against the DN where the call is currently active. Upon receipt of theINFORMATION message, the 5ESS® -2000 switch provides a confirmation tone followed by silence. After completing application ofconfirmation tone, the 5ESS® -2000 switch clears the call (also clearing the display) from the requesting DN and parks the far partyagainst the DN associated with the call. If the Basic Call Park is made from a DN with an associated primary DN terminal with a buttonconfiguration that includes a Retrieve or Answer Back feature button, then two additional INFORMATION messages are sent to theprimary DN terminal. One message is sent for the Retrieve feature button with the status indication equal to active, and the other is sentto the Answer Back feature button with the status indication equal to active.



7-3

Once the 5ESS® -2000 switch determines the call can be parked, a timer (CP-T1) is started if the timer option is applicable for theterminal group. The 5ESS® -2000 switch supports one timer value for non-attendant lines within the terminal group and another timervalue for attendant type lines associated with the terminal group. If the parked call is Retrieved or Answered Back, then the 5ESS® -2000switch cancels the timer. If the timer expires before a Retrieve or Answer Back is made, then the 5ESS® -2000 switch rings the parkedcall back to the terminal and DN that parked the call. If the Parking station is not idle at the time of the ringback, the timer resets and thecall remains Parked for another time-out interval.CPDNO (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) The Directed Call Pickup with Barge-In feature permits a subscriber to dial a code and a stationnumber and pick up a call ringing or answered by another station. That station must permit directed call pickup. If the station is ringing,normal call pickup is performed. If a subscriber tries to pick up a station already answered, barge-in alert tone is provided to the barged-in station, and a three-way call is established. With Directed Call Pickup, unlike Call Pickup, there are no defined call pickup groups(however, the two lines must be in the same terminal group). Can be used by dial code or feature button with or without one-touch.Activation of CPU features is not an FB action. Directed Call Pickup features work only within the same terminal group. Must be in thesame Pick Up queue and can only pick up calls on lines with CPU terminating feature assigned. Assignable to Analog and ISDN lines.CPDPARK (Button/Code) On analog lines, upon receipt of a flash, the 5ESS® -2000 switch must place the call on soft-hold and returnsecond dial tone to the user. An applicable Multiway feature must also be assigned for the 5ESS switch to correctly recognize the flash. Ifthe 5ESS® -2000 switch receives a Directed Call Park access code, recall dial tone is returned. Upon receipt of the DN the call is beingparked against, the 5ESS switch ensures that the DN is in the same terminal group as the requesting DN and provides a confirmation tonefollowed by silence.The 5ESS® -2000 switch accepts "#" as a valid DN entry indicating the call is to be parked against the parking DN. If "#" is entered afterthe 5ESS® -2000 switch receives digits, then the 5ESS® -2000 switch interprets this as a standard request to cancel digit timing. If theDN is in the same terminal group, then the 5ESS® -2000 switch now removes the far party from soft-hold and parks this party against theDN entered by the user. After receipt of the flash, if the 5ESS® -2000 switch does not receive a directed call park access code, then thecurrent 5ESS® -2000 switch (multiway) operation applies.For ISDN lines, the 5ESS® -2000 switch invokes Directed Call Park via a feature button. The terminal informs the 5ESS® -2000 switch,with an INFORMATION message, to park the call against a DN entered by the user. Upon receipt of the INFORMATION message, the5ESS switch places the active call on a park-hold, and selects an idle call appearance to send a HOLD ACK message to the terminal witha SETUP message. The 5ESS® -2000 switch receives address digits. If a CA is unavailable on the active call's DN, the 5ESS® -2000switch places active call on a park-hold and manually selects a CA.Upon receipt of the DN the call is parked against, the 5ESS® -2000 switch sends a confirmation tone followed by silence, and removesthe far party form park-hold, and parks the call against the DN entered by the user. The switch accepts "#" as a valid DN entry to park thecall against the parking DN. After the 5ESS® -2000 switch has sent the confirmation tone, the 5ESS® -2000 switch initiates call clearingfrom the terminal. This clearing causes the display to clear.If making a Directed Call Park from a DN with a primary DN terminal having a button configuration including a Retrieve or AnswerBack feature button, then two additional INFORMATION messages, one on the Retrieve feature button and the other on the AnswerBack feature button, are sent to the primary DN terminal, indicating that the status equals active.Once the 5ESS® -2000 switch determines that the call can be parked, a timer (CP-T1) starts (if applicable for the terminal group). Theswitch supports one timer value for non-attendant lines within the terminal group and another for attendant type lines associated with theterminal group. If the parked call is Retrieved or Answered Back, the 5ESS® -2000 switch cancels the timer. If the timer expires before aRetrieve or Answer Back is made, then the 5ESS® -2000 switch rings the parked call back to the terminal and DN that parked the call. Ifthe Parking station is not idle at the time of the ringback, the timer resets and the call remains Parked for another time-out interval.CPRTRV: Call Park Retrieve. Retrieve a call parked against a particular DN.CPUDO (Code) Directed Call Pickup permits a subscriber to dial a code and a station number and pick up a call that has been answeredor is alerting at another station. The alerted DNmust permit Directed Call Pickup. If a subscriber tries to pick up an answered call, barge-in alert tone is provided, and a 3-way call is established. With Directed Call Pickup, unlike Call Pickup, there are no defined call pickupgroups. Only intraterminal group calls can be picked up or barged in on. A dialed code for use of directed call pickup with barge-in isrequired, and the dialed code action is DPU. When building a Centrex, for proper operation, the following features are required:• A TGSR feature to specify the TG of the Centrex configuration, because directed call pickup is only allowed between members of

the same TG. The terminal with the /CPUDO feature assigned the DPU access code must have a TGSR feature with unrestrictedtermination to let them answer a call originating outside the TG of the Centrex configuration.

• An ID feature must be assigned if an IDP has been defined for the Centrex configuration, because of the dialed code required for the/CPUDO feature.

CPUDT (None) Directed Call Pickup permits a subscriber to dial a code and a station number and pick up an answered or alerting call.The alerted DN must permit Directed Call Pickup. If a subscriber tries to pick up an answered call, barge-in alert tone is provided, and a3-way call is established. With Directed Call Pickup, unlike Call Pickup, there are no defined call pickup groups. Only intraterminalgroup calls can be picked up or barged in on.For Analog subscribers, assign the /CPUDT feature to the alerting or answered DN to allow the pickup or barge-in. For ISDNsubscribers, assign the /CPUIDT feature to the alerting or answered DN to allow the pickup or barge-in.For example, if party A uses the /CPUDT or /CPUIDT2 feature to barge in on a call between parties B and C, when party B disconnects,the call is transferred. If party A uses the /CPUIDT feature to barge in on a call between parties B and C, when party B disconnects, thecall is disconnected.



7-4

/CPUEO (Code/ Button) Call Pickup Emergency Override (Originating) Feature. Assignable to Attendant Lines only. If the attendanthas /CPUEO assigned, the line to be overridden must be associated with the attendant business group (that is, the terminating line musthave the attendant hunt group number attribute set). This is done via any line assignment view./CPUEOT (None) ISDN Attendant Emergency Override for Analog Line (Terminating). Once assigned to the Analog line, the/CPUEOT feature is activated/deactivated via recent change. It is not compatible with feature buttons or dialed codes.CPUIDT: ISDN Directed Call Pickup With Barge-In (Terminating). The Directed Call Pickup (DPU) permits a subscriber to dial a codeand a station number and pick up a call ringing at another station or that has been answered by another station. The rung telephone mustpermit directed call pickup. If the station is ringing, normal call pickup is performed. If a subscriber tries to pick up a station alreadyanswered, a barge-in alert tone is provided, and a 3-way call is established. With DPU, there are no defined call pickup groups (however,both parties must be in the same terminal group).CPUIDT2 (None) Directed Call Pickup lets a subscriber dial a code and a station number, and pick up an answered or alerting call. Thealerted DN must permit Directed Call Pickup. If a subscriber tries to pick up an answered call, barge-in alert tone is provided, and a 3-way call is established. With Directed Call Pickup, unlike Call Pickup, there are no defined call pickup groups. Only intraterminal groupcalls can be picked up or barged in on.The pre-constructed feature /CPUIDT2 is available in 5E9(1) and later software releases. The operation of the /CPUIDT2 feature (forISDN lines) is the same as the /CPUDT feature (for analog lines). The /CPUIDT2 and /CPUDT features allow transfer between thebarge-in parties. The /CPUIDT feature does not allow transfer between the barge-in parties.For example, if party A uses the /CPUDT or /CPUIDT2 feature to barge in on a call between parties B and C, when party B disconnects,the call is transferred. If party A uses the /CPUIDT feature to barge in on a call between parties B and C, when party B disconnects, thecall is disconnected.CPUO Call pick up originate one group (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog, CFG Grp or palette) Use the same feature for both dial codeand feature button activation. A line can be assigned to a maximum of four pickup groups. The feature is always active. The code isdialed or the feature button is depressed to initiate the actual pick up of a call. The line parameter must specify the call pickup group.This is the number entered for SELQ1 - SELQ4. CPUO:SELQ1 and 2 are found in view 23.8 for ISDN and view 1.8 for analog. Enter thenumber of the call pickup group for each field. Valid entries are numbers 2 - 65534. If SELQ2 is specified and SELQ2 does not equal 0,then SELQ1 must be specified and SEQL1 must be between 2 and 65534. Call pickup groups 3 and 4 must be constructed features. Toadd this feature to a line, add /CPUO and /CPQ1 to the line. To add this feature to a CFG Grp, add /CPUO as the feature and CPQ1 as theaction. The line with /CPUO is the line picking up.CPUO2: Call Pickup Two Groups. Enables a station to answer a call that has terminated to another station in either of two defined callpickup groups. For a subscriber to have Call Pickup (2-Groups), the /CPUO2 feature must be assigned to the line. The line parameter datafor the /CPUO2 feature must specify the call pickup groups to be accessed.CPUT call pickup terminate one group (Code ISDN/Analog, CGF Group or palette) CPUT is available for both analog and ISDN.Call pickup terminating cannot be activated by customer action, and can only be deactivated by dialed code. To place the feature on aline, add feature /CPUT. The line with /CPUT is the line being picked up./CPUVT (None) ISDN Attendant Busy Verify for Analog Line (Terminating). The ISDN attendant uses the ISDN Attendant Busy-Verify feature to verify if an Analog line (Via DN) is busy or if there is a problem placing the call. If the directory number is busy, theattendant is bridged on the connection. Once bridged, the attendant can converse with the parties or determine if the number is busy orexperiencing problems. The attendant can override (disconnect) the talking parties. The /CPUVT Busy-Verify feature isactivated/deactivated via recent change.CWC1 (Code, Analog) The Cancel Call Waiting All Calls feature is assigned to the line when cancel call waiting for all calls is desired.This feature provides the Call Waiting Terminating service, and lets the customer dial a code to cancel the feature for the duration of acall. Code only feature. Assignable to Analog lines only.CWC2 (Code, Analog) The Cancel Call Waiting All Incoming Calls feature is assigned to the line when cancel call waiting incomingonly is desired. Intragroup calls and calls terminating from private facilities receive busy treatment as if the called line had no CallWaiting feature. Code only feature. Assignable to Analog lines only./CWD (Code) Call Waiting Deluxe Feature. The /CWD feature lets an end-user control the treatment applied to incoming calls while theend-user is off-hook on a stable call. While on an existing call, /CWD notifies the end-user of an incoming call by sending Call WaitingTone, and immediately follows that with a CAS (CPE Alerting Signal) dual tone. The CWD feature only applies to analog lines and isnot assignable to ISDN lines./CWDDT: Dial Call Waiting with Distinctive Tones provides a three-beep call waiting tone for attendant and intraterminal group calls.CWIO (Code, Analog) Call Waiting Incoming Only modifies call waiting so the terminating line only receives call waiting treatment oncalls coming into the terminal group (that is, DDD and intergroup calls). Intragroup calls and calls terminating from private facilitiesreceive busy treatment as if the called line had no call waiting feature. Code only feature. Assignable to Analog lines only.CWIODT: Call Waiting Incoming Only Distinctive Tones provide a two beep call waiting tone for incoming calls.CWO (None) The Call Waiting Originating feature lets the subscriber assign call waiting service to a called party for the length of a call.When a line calls a busy line in the same terminal group, the caller hears ringing instead of a busy tone, while the called party hears a callwaiting tone. The called party could then flash the switchhook to put the current call on hold and answer the calling party. If the calledparty hangs up, the station rings and, upon answer, is connected to the calling party. This service is restricted to intraterminal group calls.CWT (None) Call Waiting Terminating lets a line in the talking state be alerted by a call waiting tone when another call is attempting tocomplete to that line. The call waiting tone is only audible to the line with the call waiting feature activated. Ringing is returned to the



7-5

originating line. The service also provides a hold function activated by a switchhook flash. Consecutive flashes let the subscriberalternately talk to the original and the new calling party. If the subscriber disconnects while one party is on hold, the subscriber isautomatically rung back and, upon answer, is connected to the held party.DN (None) Directory Number (Primary)DNA (None) Directory Number Appearance. Also referred to as Call Appearance./DIDNP (Code/Feature) /DIDNP ISDN Per-Call TN Privacy Display. For 5E11 and later releases, the 5ESS supports per call directorynumber privacy on an LTSB line (both lead and non-lead). If the 5ESS switch receives the access code for caller ID blocking from eitherthe lead or the non-lead line of a one-DN LTSB line, then the 5ESS switch marks the call (made after receipt of the access code) as"private." This access code applies only to a privacy feature whose line can be provisioned (e.g., /DIDNP). There are two types of TNPrivacy. All-call TN Privacy prevents the number of the calling party from being displayed at the terminator on all calls. Per-call TNPrivacy prevents the number of the calling party from being displayed at the terminator on a per-call basis. If the terminal has all-call TNPrivacy, then per-call Privacy can display the number of the calling party on a per-call basis. Per-call TN Privacy requires a FeatureButton or Dialed Code./DIDLX (Code/Button) ISDN Deluxe Display. Per-call TN Privacy requires a Feature Button or Dialed Code. /DIINSP and /DITD: Display and Privacy Feature, Inspect Feature. Controls the ISDN Time and Date Display. These TN Privacyfeatures let the calling party control the display of TN information at the called party's terminal./DRATT: Distinctive Ringing Attendant. Allows a subscriber to have distinctive ringing on attendant calls. A subscriber to theDistinctive Ringing feature may have distinctive ringing cycles based upon whether the incoming call is intraterminal group,interterminal group, Dial Call Waiting, Call Waiting Originating, or completed over private facilities./DRCWO: Distinctive Ringing on Call Waiting Originating Calls. Lets a subscriber have distinctive ringing on CWO calls./DRDCW: Distinctive Ringing Dial Call Waiting. Lets a subscriber have distinctive ringing on dial call waiting calls./DRIC (None) Distinctive Ringing on Incoming Calls. The Distinctive Ringing (DR) family of features provides distinctive ringingpatterns to the subscriber line for 20-Hz analog ringing, indicating the origin of calls terminating to the subscriber./EDA (Code/Button) CUSTOM ISDN EDS Autocall. The Electronic Directory Service (EDS) uses a user-defined, on-line directory database stored on an applications processor (AP) accessible from Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) station sets, ISDN dataterminals, and analog users via cathode ray tube (CRT) and modem within the customer group. Users search and retrieve data entries byentering single or multiple keys. The Auto Call feature places a call to a selected DN by pressing a button or dialing an access code/EDAP (Code/Button) EDS Autocall, Calling Name Display at Primary displays primary calling number, Recall option./EDNULL (Code/Button) ISDN EDS Null (No Options). Basic EDS feature employs none of the EDS options./EDS: Electronic Directory Service. Lets business customer users access a directory, stored on the AP, for call and personnel info./ICM, ICM1, ICM2, ICM3, ICM4: ISDN Intercom. Lets an ISDN station user use a general (any) call appearance for calls to and froma particular group of users within an ICOM group./IDP: A private dialing plan the customer uses to interpret dialing codes instead of using the Office Dialing Plan for digit interpretation./LAC1 (Code/Button) LASS Automatic Callback Subscription feature. The Automatic Callback (AC) feature lets a user automaticallyplace a call to the last incoming calling directory number (LICDN) of the terminal. The LICDN is the address of the last party that called.Automatic Callback feature activation lets an end-user automatically call back the last incoming calling directory number currentlyassociated with the end-user's terminal./LAR1 (Code/Button) LASS Automatic Recall Subscription. The AR feature lets a calling terminal automatically place a call to the lastoutgoing calling directory number (LOCDN) currently associated with the terminal and/or to camp onto the LOCDN upon receiving busytreatment. The LOCDN is the address of the last party called by a user of the calling terminal. If the call cannot be completedimmediately because the called directory number (DN) is busy, then the Automatic Recall feature lets the calling terminal camp on(camp-on is defined as having the network monitor the busy/idle status of the called address) to the LOCDN. Code/Button assignable/LARGA: LASS Automatic Recall Generally Available/LICNDA /LICNDA [Calling Number Delivery (CND) All Terminals] Line Identification Always Active, Calling Number Delivered toAll DNs. ISDN Only Feature. Feature automatically activated- not Code/Feature Button assignable./LICNDP: Line Identification Always Active, Calling Number Delivered to Primary DN/LIDADA: Line Identification Code Activate, Calling Number Delivered to All DNs/LIDADAO: Line Identification Code Activate, Calling Number Delivered to All DNs and Display Information About Called Party/LIDADP: Line Identification Code Activate, Calling Number Delivered to Primary DN/LIDLXA /LIDLXA [Calling Number Delivery (CND) - All Terminals & OCLID - Flat Rate] Line Identification Always Active, CallingNumber Delivered to All DNs and Display Information About Called Party. ISDN Only Feature. Feature automatically activated- notCode/Feature Button assignable./LIOCLID: Line Identification Always Active, Display Information About Called Party/LIRCNMA: Line Identification Always Active, Calling Name Delivered to All DNs/MDRTOCL: Message Detail Recording to Customer Location (Always Active)MDNL: Multiple DNs per Line. Lets the user activate or deactivate call forwarding for the master DN, for the dependent DNs, or forboth the master and dependent DNs.MLHG: Multiline Hunt Group. A group of customer facilities identified as a group in translations. When calls are placed to the MLHG,the 5ESS® -2000 switch hunts for an idle member of the group beginning with the dialed Directory Number (DN).



7-6

MSAAD ISDN MSS Basic - Attendant Call Coverage, Audible MWI and Deactivate MWI (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) Availablefor feature button use and dialed code on both analog and ISDN. Each line can be assigned up to 4 MSS features. If assigned to an analogline, then fields AUTO CALL and MSG RTRVL DISP must be set to N in the default parameters of the feature. If an EDS and MSSfeature is assigned to a line, it should have the same BCID (Business Customer Identification) for both features. Assign /MS* as featureand DCTMWI for action with no parameters to a feature button in a CFG Grp. Also, assign /MSAAD as a feature and enter the messagegroup in view 1.8 and 23.8. This feature may not be assigned to a secondary-only ISDN line./MSAAD: ISDN MSS Basic - Attendant Call Coverage, Audible MWI, and Deactivate MWI/MSAIPAD: ISDN MSS Deluxe - Attendant Call Coverage, LWC Incoming/Outgoing POD, Audible MWI, and Deactivate MW/MSAIPV: SDN MSS Deluxe - Attendant Call Coverage, LWC Incoming/Outgoing POD, and Visual MWI/MSALL: ISDN MSS Deluxe - All Options except Audible MWI/MSAV: ISDN MSS Basic - Visual MWI/MSIMPVA: ISDN MSS Deluxe - LWC Incoming/Outgoing, Message Retrieval Display, POD, Visual MWI, and Autocall/MSIPAD: ISDN MSS Deluxe - LWC Incoming/Outgoing, POD, Audible MWI, and Deactivate MWI/MSIPV: ISDN MSS Deluxe - LWC Incoming/Outgoing, POD, and Visual MWI/MSNONE: ISDN MSS No Options/MSO: ISDN MSS Deluxe - LWC OutgoingMW3WC (None, Analog) The Multiway 3-Way Calling feature can hold calls, transfer calls, or allow conference calls for up to threeparties. It defines the effect of subscriber attempts to flash or disconnect while attempting to hold, add, or transfer calls. Multiway 3-WayCalling is a switch hook 'Flash" initiated feature and is not assignable to Code/Button. Assignable to Analog lines only.MW6WC (None) For a subscriber to have the 6-way conference calling capability, the /MW6WC feature must be assigned to the line.A 6-port conference circuit is a hardware requirement for this feature. In addition, a 6-port SFG must be established for the controller'sterminal group, or the terminal group must equal 0 (zero). To flash on a two-way call, another multiway feature with flash ability mustalso be assigned to the line. The default parameter data of the /MW6WC feature does not require modification unless there are less thansix lines available on the conference call (for example, there is no 6-port conference circuit available). When building a Centrex, thefollowing features are also required:A TGSR feature is required to specify the TG of the Centrex configuration, because the /MW6WC feature requires a simulated facilitygroup (SFG) assigned to it. A TGSR feature is not required for POTS lines with the /MW6WC feature, because the default TG (TG 0)can be used as the TG associated with the SFG. The PFA Terminal Group View (RC View 7.2) is used to assign the SFG to the/MW6WC customer. The Private Facility Access (PFA) Simulated Facility View (RC View 7.3) defines the SFG, and must be definedbefore it is referenced on the PFA Terminal Group View (RC View 7.2).The /MW6WC feature can be invoked by either flashing on an existing call and obtaining a second dial tone and dialing the /MW6WCcode, or by dialing the /MW6WC code immediately after going off-hook. If the ability to flash on an existing call and the dialing of the6-way code is required, a multiway feature with flash as an entry point ("FLASH" option equal to "Y") must be assigned to the line. Forexample, the Call Hold feature with flash as an entry point (that is, /MWCH2) can be assigned with /MW6WC.When an Individualized Dialing Plan (IDP) is defined for the Centrex configuration, an ID feature is required to specify the name of theIDP because of the dialed code associated with the feature. The /MW6WC multiway feature can be assigned with any other multiwayfeature, because its entry points start in the middle and from off-hook ("INMID" and "OFFHK" are equal to "Y")./MWCH1 (Code) Call Hold 1 (Dialed Code Access to Another MWC Feature). For a subscriber to have the Call Hold feature, either the/MWCH1 or /MWCH2 feature must be assigned with that feature. The /MWCH1 feature is used when another multiway feature withflash as an entry point ("FLASH" equal to "Y") is assigned to the line. A dialed code is required after a switch hook flash to invoke theCall Hold feature and is then used to alternate to the longest held party.MWCH2 Call Hold 2 (Flash Access to Another MWC Feature) Available for analog only. Incompatible with MWCTIA1.MWCTA1 (Analog) Use the Multiway Call Transfer Attendant feature when the Call Hold feature (/MWCH1) or any other MultiwayCalling feature invoked by dialed code, is also assigned to the line. This is a "Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable.MWCTA2 (None, Analog) Use the Multiway Call Transfer Attendant feature when no Call Hold feature (/MWCH1) is assigned to theline. This is a "Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTIA1 Call Transfer All Calls (no restrictions) (None, Analog) this is the analog version of MWICTIA. This feature is invokedby using the flash. Only one feature using the flash-hook is allowed per line. Cannot be assigned if the line already has /MWCH2assigned. Line must use /MWCH1 if /MWCTIA1 will be assigned. This feature is not assigned to a feature button. Must have“unrestricted” terminations and originations as part of its terminal group if a terminal group is assigned or the feature will not work.Cannot be assigned if the line already has /MWCH2 assigned.MWCTIA2 (None) Used when one leg of the call must be in the same terminal group as the subscriber to allow transfer. A three-waycall does not require either leg to be in the same terminal group as the line with the Call Transfer feature.MWCTIA3 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual All Calls (Added Leg in the Same Group). The /MWCTIA3 allowstransfers only when the added leg is within its terminal group. This is a "Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable.Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTIA4 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual All Calls (Manual Three-Way of a PFA Call). The /MWCTIA3 allowstransfers only when the added leg is within its terminal group. This is a "Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable.Assignable to Analog lines only.



7-7

MWCTII1 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual Incoming Only No Restrictions with Call Hold (/MWCH1). This is a"Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTII2 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual Incoming Only No Restrictions without Call Hold (/MWCH1). This is a"Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTII3 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual Incoming Only Within Group with Call Hold (/MWCH1). This is a"Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTII4 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Individual Incoming Only Within Group without Call Hold (/MWCH1). This is a"Flash" entry feature only, not code or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTI01 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Internal Only with Call Hold (/MWCH1).This is a "Flash" entry feature only, notcode or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only.MWCTI02 (None, Analog) Multiway Call Transfer Internal Only without Call Hold (/MWCH1).This is a "Flash" entry feature only, notcode or button assignable. Assignable to Analog lines only./MWI3WC ISDN 3-Way Calling Feature. The Three-Way Calling feature lets a station in the talking state add a third party to the callwithout operator assistance. Once assigned to the terminal via Recent Change, this feature is invoked by pressing the CONFERENCEbutton. The pre-constructed 3-way feature cannot be assigned to a Feature ButtonMWI6WB2 (None) ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (Transfer - No Restrictions): This feature lets a station user add up to five otherparties to an existing two-way call, using a single conference feature button. Transfer operation occurs if the controller presses thetransfer button or disconnects. There are no terminal group restrictions for conference members. This feature is available in 5E9(1) andlater releases.MWI6WB3 (Button, ISDN) ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (Explicit Transfer). Multiway 6-Way Calling features allow a station user toadd up to five other parties to an existing two-way call. In addition to forming six-way calls, this feature can also be used to form three-way calls. This feature allows normal transfer operation and allows conferees of a conference call to be transferred to each other if thecontroller presses the transfer feature button. If the controller disconnects, transfer is not allowed. There are no terminal group restrictionsapplied to the conferees. Feature Button Only.MWI6WBA (Button, ISDN) ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (Transfer Within TG Only). Multiway 6-Way Calling features let a stationuser add up to five other parties to an existing two-way call. In addition to forming six-way calls, this feature can form three-way calls.Allows normal transfer operation and conferees of a conference call to be transferred to each other if the controller presses the transferfeature button, or if the controller disconnects. In addition, at least one of the conferees must be in the same terminal group as thecontroller. Feature Button Only MWI6WBN (Button, ISDN)ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (No Transfer Allowed). Multiway 6-Way Calling features let a station user add up to five other parties toan existing two-way call, or form three-way calls. Prevents transfer of the conferees. Feature Button only.MWI6WBN: National ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (No Transfer Allowed). Lets a station user add up to five other parties to anexisting two-way call, using a single conference feature button. No transfer of the conference members is allowed. This feature isavailable in 5E9(1) and later software releases.MWI6WBT (Feature Button) ISDN 6-Way Flexible Calling (Explicit Transfer Within TG Only). Multiway 6-Way Calling features let astation user add up to five other parties to an existing two-way call. Can form three-way calls. If the controller disconnects, transfer is notallowed. In addition, at least one of the conferees must be in the same terminal group as the controller for the transfer to complete.MWI6WC: ISDN Six-Way Conference Calling. Used in conjunction with Speed Calling. If a customer with Speed Calling is on anexisting call, the user can initiate 6-Way Conference Calling, receive a special dial tone, and dial the speed calling code of another party.A customer on an existing call cannot initiate 6-Way Conference Calling and change the speed calling list instead of dialing a third party.MWICTA2 (None) ISDN Flexible Calling Call Transfer Individual All Calls: Allows normal transfer operation and conferees of aconference call to be transferred to each other if controller presses the transfer feature button or disconnects. At least one conferee mustbe in the same terminal group as the controller. Available in 5E9(1) and later releases.MWICTA3 (None, ISDN) ISDN Flexible Calling Explicit Call Transfer Individual All Calls: Allows normal transfer operation andconferees to be transferred to each other if controller presses transfer feature button. If controller disconnects, transfer is not allowed.There are no terminal group restrictions applied to conferees. Available in 5E9(1) and later releases.MWICTA4 (None, ISDN) ISDN Flexible Calling Explicit Call Transfer Individual Internal Only: Allows normal transfer operation andconferees to be transferred to each other if controller presses transfer feature button. If controller disconnects, transfer is not allowed. Atleast one conferee must be in the same terminal group as controller in order to complete transfer. This is a 'Button' assignable feature.MWICTAT: ISDN Call Transfer Attendant.MWICTI1: Can transfer incoming calls to a centrex configuration to any other line.MWICTI2: Can transfer incoming calls to a centrex configuration to any other line.MWICT13: Used when the added party must be in the same terminal group for the transfer to be allowed, and the Call Hold feature/MWCH1 is assigned to the line. With this feature, the added party may be outside the terminal group. However, the call cannot betransferred to a line outside the terminal group.MWICTIA ISDN Call Transfer Individual All Calls (no restrictions) (None, ISDN) Defines the use of the CONF and XFER buttons,and cannot be assigned to any other feature button. Only available for ISDN. Once the feature is assigned, then it is invoked by pressingeither conference or transfer. This feature is mutually exclusive with the following: MWI3WC (conf only), MWIACH (conf only),MWICTIN (conf and transfer), MWICTOU (conf and transfer), MWICTI1 (conf and transfer), MWICTI2 (conf and transfer), MWICTI3



7-8

(conf and transfer), MWICTAT (conf and transfer to attendant only), MWISAT1 (conf and transfer for satellite). It is allowed incombination with MWI6WC.PFA (None) The Private Facilities Access (PFA) modular feature lets subscribers have dial access to various types of public and privateswitching arrangements.SC1 (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) 1-digit Speed Call List - No Customer Changeable. The Speed Calling feature lets a subscriberspecify a speed calling list containing dialing sequences, each of which is associated with a unique speed calling code. When a line withthis feature sends a valid speed calling code, the system attempts to complete the call to the dialing sequences. The Speed Calling featureprovides the ability to store digit sequences of up to 32 characters in length. Code/Button Assignable. Note: This feature requires thepopulation of the speed call list via RCV view (4V2). SC1SSC1C Speed Call List 1 Digit Changeable (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog, CFG Grp or palette) Available in both dialed code andfeature button. SC1C can be applied to both analog and ISDN lines. Speed call list name needs to be entered in view 1.8 or 23.8 in fieldSC1NAME. Indicate whether to share the list by an entry in SC1S, and add the global feature /SC1C to the line to let the customerchange the speed call list. The speed call list should have been created in view 4.1, which will give the speed call list parameters such asname, blocking from sharing, terminal group override, and the number of codes available in the list. If SC1NAME is specified, thenSC1S must have an entry. If SC1NAME is either “A” followed by the 10 digit TN or a 4 digit trunk group number followed by a 4 digitmember number, then SC1S must be set to N. In all other cases, SC1S must not equal “N”. To assign feature, specify the name of thespeed call list in view 1.8 or 23.8, then add /SC1C to the line as a feature or add /SC1C as a feature to the CFG Grp with AD1CH to usethe feature button to change the list entry. Or, add /SC1C as a feature to the CFG Grp with AD1USE as the action to use the featurebutton to use the speed call list.SC2 (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) 2-digit Speed Call List - No Customer Changes. The Speed Calling feature lets a subscriber specify aspeed calling list containing dialing sequences, each of which is associated with a unique speed calling code. When a line with thisfeature sends a valid speed calling code, the system attempts to complete the call to the dialing sequences. The Speed Calling featureprovides the ability to store digit sequences of up to 32 characters in length. Code/Button Assignable. Note: This feature requires thepopulation of the speed call list via RCV view (4V2). SC2SSC2C Speed Call List 2 Digit Changeable (Button/Code, ISDN/Analog) The 2-Digit Customer-Changeable Speed Calling featureprovides the services for the Speed Calling feature, and permits initial entry and changing of a speed calling list by dialing 2-digit codesfrom the associated subscriber line. After updating a subscriber change to a speed-calling list, the system confirms that the change hasbeen accepted. For unshared customer change-changeable speed calling, the switch creates the speed call list when a speed-calling featureis assigned to the line. The /SC2C feature is Code/Button assignable./SCAFR (Code/Button) LASS Selective Call Acceptance (Flat-Rate Billing) feature. The Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) featurefurther expands the LATA-wide LASS capabilities. It lets customers accept incoming voice calls only from certain calling parties.Calling party telephone numbers (identity attributes) may be 7- or 10-digit directory numbers or 1- to 7-digit extension numbers for userswith extension dialing./SCFFRR (Code/Button) LASS Selective Call Forwarding Flat-Rate Billing. Selective Call Forwarding (SCF) feature allows customersto pre-select calls which will forward based on the telephone number of the calling party. Customers can use 7- and 10-digit directorynumbers (DNs) as telephone numbers, and 1- to 7-digit extension numbers if they have extension dialing. These telephone numbers areeither entered directly (dialed) by the customer, as the last call to ring, or applied as a call waiting tone to the SCF customer's station./SCRFRG (Code/Button) LASS Selective Call Rejection Flat-Rate Billing with Gentle Announcement. The Local Area SignalingServices (LASS) Selective Call Rejection (SCR) feature screens terminating calls using a customer specified screening list. Call attemptsto the SCR customer from parties specified on the SCR screening list are prevented from terminating to the customer. Instead, theseparties are routed to a denial announcement informing the caller that the called party is not accepting their call. The SCR customerreceives no indication of the call attempt. Calls from parties not on the SCR customer's rejection list terminate normally/SDAFR (Code/Button) LASS Selective Distinctive Alert with Flat-Rate Billing. The Local Area Signaling Services (LASS) SelectiveDistinctive Alert (SDA) feature lets residential and business customers pre-select which calls will receive distinctive alerting treatmentbased on the telephone number of the calling party. Residential and business customers can use 7- and 10-digit directory numbers astelephone numbers, and can use 1- to 7-digit extension numbers as telephone numbers if they have extension dialing. These telephonenumbers can be entered directly (dialed in) by the SDA customer, or as the last call to alert the customer. Alerting is either ringing orapplying a call waiting tone to a terminating station./SERHLN Series completing telephone number. Indicates the hunt-to telephone number. Call Processing for Series Completion hunts alinked list of TNs until an idle line is found or sixteen Series Completion attempts have been made. Beginning with the 5E6 SoftwareRelease, Series Completion on BRI (Basic Rate Interface) lines for CSV (Circuit-Switched Voice) calls is supported. Series Completionis similar to Call Forward Busy Line except that each call leg is not billed. With ISDN, as with analog lines, the feature is assigned perDN (including secondary DNs). A Series Completion Group can consist of all analog lines, all ISDN lines, or a mixture of the two, andcan include Shared DNs. The two types of Series Completion groups are Regular and Circular. In the Regular group, the last member ofthe list is not marked to series complete. In a Circular group, the last member series completes back to the first member of the group.This feature is not allowed for CSD calls./TDACVT (Code) Time of day control of ACVT (Attendant Control Of Voice Terminals)/TDARS (Code) Time of Day Control for ARS. Time-of-Day provides a method to automatically change the Automatic Route Selectionpattern parameter, according to a pre-specified schedule.



7-9

/TDDLX (Code) Deluxe Time of Day feature. TOD for group data, line private data, and trunk data such as: ACCT (Account Codes)ATH (Authorization Codes) CF (Call Forwarding) CW (Call Waiting) DR (Distinctive Ringing) CPUO (Call Pickup Originating) CPUT(Call Pickup Terminating) TGSR (Terminal Group and Station Restriction)./TGRESTR Terminal Group and Station RestrictionTGFFT Terminal group options (None, ISDN/Analog) Only one instance of a terminal group option may be applied to a line. May beapplied to both analog and ISDN. TGFFT= Fully Restricted Originating, Fully Restricted Terminating, and Route to Tone. TGFUT=Fully Restricted Originating, Unrestricted Terminating, and Route to Tone Terminal Group option. The fully restricted feature restrictsthe line’s ability to make or receive calls. The line can originate or receive calls within the terminal group. Unrestricted terminating letsthe line receive calls from within or outside of the terminal group. Assign this feature to a line by adding the option /TGFFT or /TGFUTto a line, then entering the terminal group number in view 1.8 or 23.8. This feature cannot be assigned to a feature button. It cannot beactivated or deactivated - it is always on.TGFST(None) Terminal Group option – Semi-restricted terminating, fully restricted originating.TGFUT Terminal group options (None, ISDN/Analog) Same as TGFFT.TGSFT(None) Terminal Group option – Semi-restricted originating, fully restricted terminating.TGSST(None) Terminal Group option – Semi-restricted originating and terminating.TGSUT(None) Terminal Group option – Semi-restricted originating, unrestricted terminating.TGUFT(None) Terminal Group option - Fully restricted terminating, unrestricted originating.TGUST(None) Terminal Group option – Semi-restricted terminating, unrestricted originating./TGUUT(None) Terminal Group option - Unrestricted originating, unrestricted terminating



8-1

8 Appendix – DMS100 Station Features ListThree-Way Calling (3WC) Lets the user place an existing call on hold and call another party. The user can thenswitch between parties or connect the three parties into a three-port conference.

Automatic Answer Back (AAB) Automatically answers incoming calls to primary directory number (PDN) at fourrings.

Answer Agent Key (AAK) Designates a secondary directory number (SDN) on the supervisor set to answer calls fromagents. Calls cannot originate from this key, nor can the user enter access codes with this key.

Automatic Call Back (ACB) Lets subscribers place a call to the last station that the subscriber called. If the line isbusy, ACB monitors the line until the line becomes idle and can accept the call.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Distributes large numbers of incoming calls to a minimum of one centraldirectory number, and/or to a fixed group of directory positions.

ACD Not Ready (ACDNR) Makes the ACD INCALLS key unavailable to receive automatic call distribution (ACD)calls. Releases an answered ACD call with the ACDNR key. Assign the ACDNR feature only if key 1 is an ACDINCALLS key.

Anonymous Caller Rejection (ACRJ) Lets a subscriber reject incoming calls from callers who block their names ordirectory numbers. The system routes anonymous calls to an announcement.

Answer Emergency Key (AEMK) Lets an automatic call distribution (ACD) agent immediately conference in asupervisor or an auxiliary device. The ACD agent can use this feature in the event of threatening or abusive calls.

Additional Functional Calls (AFC) A single functional call (SFC) is a single-call capability on a DN. The systemassigns an SFC feature to a call appearance a the user adds it to a logical terminal. Multiple call capacity for NI-1 setsare added to the SFC DN by assigning more functional call (AFC) members. Assign the AFC feature to the same key asthe assigned DN. You can assign up to four more calls for each SFC DN. The AFC members are identical to thecorresponding SFC DN.

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) Assigns Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) trigger behaviors to an agent.

Automatic Recall Dialable Directory Number (ARDDN) Lets subscribers dial a feature code to set up a call to theDN where the subscriber placed the last incoming call. The ARDDN delivers a dialable DN to the Automatic Recall(AR) option subscriber. The Dialable Directory Number (DDN) option shows the digits to dial. The AR optionprovides the last call recall capability.

Automatic Recall (AR) Lets a subscriber call the last station that called the subscriber. If the destination line is busy,AR monitors the line until the line becomes idle and can accept the call.

Agent Status Lamp (ASL) Lets a supervisor monitor the status of an agent position. This does not interfere with thecall. The lamp for the assigned agent status key will show the status of the call.

Automatic Time and Charge (ATC) An option offered subscribers for Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) calls. A timeand charge call is identified by a special category code. Associates a time and charge subscriber with the specialcategory code.

Automatic Dial (AUD) Lets business set subscribers call a number the subscriber dials regularly. The number can beprogrammed or changed. The number is called by pressing the AUD key.

Automatic Line (AUL) Connects to a predetermined location when off-hook is reported. The automatic line (AUL)feature connects to a set location when a directory number or an assigned AUL feature line reports an off-hook status.When the user assigns the AUL feature the system establishes the set location.

Automatic Display (AUTODISP) Caller ID feature automatically shows information on incoming calls. AUTODISPshows incoming call information (calling name, number) automatically on the display of Meridian Business Sets(MBS).

Bulk Calling Line Identification (BCLID) Lets the line receive call related information on incoming calls.

Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Provides Direct Call Selection (direct dialing to a monitored DN through the BLF key, andallows MBS users to monitor station status of a DN through MBS lamp states.

Bridged Night Number (BNN) Lets subscriber advertise a number for night service without adding a third wire.Assign BNNs to DN hunt, multiline hunt (MLH), and distributed line hunt (DLH) groups on an individual-line basis. If



8-2

necessary, the hunt can use the BNNs. If the BNNs form a hunt group, the hunt is in a sequence. If the BNN group hasthe CIR feature assigned, the hunt is not in a sequence.

Call Agent (CAG) Lets an automatic call distribution (ACD) supervisor call an agent position. The CAG feature andthe Observe agent (OBS) feature together allow an ACD supervisor to join an observed all.

Call Forwarding Busy Internal Calls Only (CBE) Stops forwarding of external calls. At the same time, permitsforwarding of intragroup calls to a remote station within the customer group.

Call Forwarding Busy Intragroup (CBI) Lets stations forward calls only to locations within predefined groups.

Call Forwarding Busy Unrestricted (CBU) Forwards Call Forwarding Busy calls to remote stations.

Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) Disables Call Waiting (CWT) during a call or when idle. If user activates CCW during acall, CCW cancels all CWT functions, including display, for that call. If activated during the idle state, CCW cancelsCWT functions for the next incoming or outgoing call. After the call is completed, Call Waiting is restored to the user'sline. Both Call Waiting (CW) and Cancel Call Waiting can reside on an analog station independently. If CW is beingdeactivated, CCW is automatically removed in C3C®, just as it is on the switch.

Customer Data Change (CDC) Lets a MAP Passthru end user modify line information.

Exclude External Calls from Call Forwarding (CDE) Prevents forwarding of calls from outside the customer group.

Exclude Intragroup Calls from Call Forwarding (CDI) Prevents forwarding of intragroup calls.

Call Forwarding Don't Answer Unrestricted (CDU) Forwards unanswered calls to remote station.

Call Forwarding Busy (CFB) When a station is busy, forwards incoming calls to another station in same customergroup.

Call Forwarding Don't Answer (CFD) Forwards calls not answered in specified time to a designated station orattendant.

Call Forwarding Do Not Answer Variable Timer (CFDVT) Lets an end user specify how long a call rings beforethe system forwards the call to another station.

Call Forward Fixed (CFF) Can forward calls from a station to a location determined by the operating company. Theuser cannot program the number to which the station forwards the calls.

Call Forward Intragroup (CFI) Lets stations forward calls only to locations in defined customer groups.

Call Forward Do Not Answer for Hunt Group (CFGD) Lets user assign call forwarding do not answer to separatehunt groups: directory number hunt (DNH), distributed line hunt (DLH), and multiline hunt (MLH). With CFGD, callsto idle hunt group stations ring for a set amount of time before the system forwards the calls. The system can forwardthe calls to the next station in the hunt sequence. The system can forward the calls to a DN in the same customer group.

Call Forward Per Key Basis (CFK) Lets station users forward each DN on a business set to separate DNs.

Call Forwarding MADN Secondary Number (CFMDN) Lets secondary units of a multiple appearance directorynumber (MADN) group activate or deactivate call forwarding (CFF, CFU and CFI only) from a station.

Call Forward Remote Access (CFRA) Lets single-line set use another line to activate or deactivate CFU, CFI, CFF,or CFW.

CFS Simultaneous / Screening (CFS) Lets the user call forward simultaneous multiple calls through a station.

Call Forward Universal (CFU) Lets incoming calls be rerouted to another telephone number. This number can be inthe MDC customer group, the local calling area, or a foreign exchange. The call can also be forwarded to an attendant.

Call Forward with Announcement (CFWANN) Provides an announcement to the caller if the system forwards thecall to a remote DN.

Call Hold (CHD) On a 500/2500 set, lets a subscriber hold a call. If a party does not go off-hook, the subscriber canhold a call indefinitely. While the call holds, the station with CHD can perform other tasks. Only one call can be onhold at a time.

Controlled Interflow (CIF) Lets a supervisor place an automatic call distribution (ACD) group in a controlledinterflow mode. A controlled interflow mode directs new incoming calls to a route determined by the customer in TableACDGRP.



8-3

Circular Hunt (CIR) Lets hunting complete a full cycle through a hunt group. CIR is not affected by the dialed DN.

Calling Line Flash (CLF) Lets a hold be placed on incoming calls in the switch. The hookswitch is flashed, then thesubscriber stays off-hook to hold an incoming call in the switch. After the DMS-100 receives the hookswitch flash, itgenerates a log report and an alarm at the central office. The subscriber can trace the call back to the originating party.The CLF feature does not work with call-originating ISDN telephone sets. A user can call from an ISDN phone set toan Integrated Business Network (IBN) line that has CLF assigned.

Call Supervisor (CLSUP) A single key that performs an automatic call distribution (ACD) to the supervisor. TheCLSUP key also answers calls from the supervisor that the CAG key originates.

Calling Name Delivery Blocking (CNAB) Lets the system block the delivery of the name of the caller.

Calling Name Delivery (CNAMD) Displays name of incoming caller and when the call occurred on the CPE.

Calling Number Delivery (CND) Displays the DN, time, and date of the call on the customer premises equipment(CPE).

Calling Number Delivery Blocking (CNDB) Blocks the delivery of the calling number.

Conference Calling (CNF) Lets a station have a conference call with up to 30 parties without an attendant. Themembers of the conference can belong to the same or different customer groups. The members also can belong to astation on a trunk.

Cutoff on Disconnect (COD) Applies an open battery signal to line after subscriber terminates call and timed releasedisconnect timing expires. The line feature COD idles line. The value of the office parameterCUTOFF_ON_DISC_TIME in table OFCVAR determines time of open interval. The COD feature overridesGLOBAL_CUTOFF_ON_DISCONNECT parameter, which routes the call to disconnect treatment after the openbattery signal.

Customer Oriented Trace (COT) Lets a customer that receives a malicious call request an automatic trace of thatcall.

Call Pickup (CPU) Lets station in an IBN customer group answer incoming calls to another station in same pickupgroup.

Call Transfer Waiting (CTW) Provides special tones in a 3-way call or call transfer that informs the conferees thatthe controlling party has not dropped out of the call.

Dial Call Waiting (CWD) Lets a business set user force call waiting on a busy station. The busy station can be a500/2500 set or a business set with a call waiting (CWT) feature key.

Call Waiting Intragroup (CWI) Lets CWT be applied to intragroup calls, in addition to those already allowed withCWT.

Call Waiting Originating (CWO) Lets an originating line automatically force a busy call line into call waiting.

Call Waiting Ringback (CWR) Informs caller if destination is idle or on a call. The user must assign CWR to theterminating line.

Call Waiting (CWT) Lets the system alert a busy station when an incoming call attempts to reach the DN.

Call Waiting Exempt (CWX) Stops Dial Call Waiting (CWD), Call Waiting Originating (CWO) from interrupting abusiness set user.

Call Waiting Ringback (CWR) Informs the caller if the destination is idle or engaged in another call. CXR isperformed after the user assigns CWR to the terminating line.Call Transfer (CXR) Allows one party to transfer a call to another station. The controlling party canremain on the line to ensure that the receiving station answers.Display Agent Status (DASK) With the press of single key, lets an automatic call distribution (ACD)supervisor monitor the status of the agent positions assigned to an ACD.



8-4

Directed Call Pickup Barge-In (DCBI) Lets a station answer calls that ring on another line within the same customergroup. The same DMS switch must serve the call for the DCBI to function. The called station can answer the callbefore the station initiating the call finishes the pickup sequence. In this case, the station initiating the call can interruptthe answered call and connect to a three-way call.

Directed Call Pickup Barge-In Exempt (DCBX) Lets a station block attempts of stations with DCBI to interrupt thecall.

Denied Call Forwarding (DCF) Does not let a line receive forwarded calls, thus protecting computer ports.

Directed Call Park (DCPK) Lets the system put calls on hold or park calls against any valid DN. The station can haveup to 100 calls parked at once. Any station can retrieve the calls.

Directed Call Pickup (DCPU) Lets a station answer a ringing line in same customer group before the called partydoes.

Directed Call Pickup Exempt (DCPX) Lets a station block stations with the directed call pickup barge-in (DCBI) ordirected call pick-up (DCPU) features. Stations cannot interrupt or pickup a call that rings on this station.

Dialable Directory Number (DDN) Lets the customer premises equipment (CPE) display incoming calling name,number, time, and date of the call. The CPE displays the number such that the called party can return the call.

Digitone (DGT) Lets a telephone set generate an address in the form of dual-tone multi-frequency signals.

Denied Incoming (DIN) Let selected lines receive incoming calls initiated outside the customer group.

Display (DISP) Denotes a business set on a PSET line as a display business set.

Distributed Line Hunt (DLH) The DLH is assigned to groups that require an equal distribution of calls, and permitsdistributed line hunting based on the follow stipulations:

• Only one pilot DN associates with the hunt group.• Line hunts start after the previous hunt finds the first idle line.• Line hunts continue until process reaches start point of the hunt. At the start point, the caller receives a busytone.• The caller does not receive a busy tone if the user assigns features Line Overflow to Directory Number

(LOD) or Line Overflow to Route (LOR) to the hunt group.

DN Directory Number

Do Not Disturb (DND) Lets an attendant restrict calls to a station or group of stations. While calls are restricted, theattendant must override DND to complete a call to the affected station(s).

Directory Number Hunt (DNH) Enables directory number hunting based on the follow stipulations:• Each line in the hunt group must have a directory number (DN).• The caller must dial the DN to access the hunt group.• The number of lines hunted depends on the hunting option (circular or linear) assigned to the DNH group." Circular hunting hunts all lines in the hunt group and does not consider the start point." Linear hunting starts at the number the caller dials and stops at the last number in the group.

Denied Origination (DOR) Does not let a line originate calls. If an attempt is made to originate a call from that line,the call receives originating suspended service (ORSS) treatment.

Display Queue Status (DQS) Lets an ACD supervisor display the load status information for an ACD group.

Display Queue Threshold (DQT) Illuminates a lamp to display the status of the incoming call queue. The statusappears when the ACD agent or supervisor presses the associated key of the set.

Distinctive Ringing/Call Waiting (DRCW): Allow for special ring tones and call waiting alert tones when receivingcalls from the numbers specified. This service adds additional telephone numbers to an existing line. When a callerdials one of these "distinctive ringing" numbers, the telephones ring such that you can tell which line is ringing beforeanswering the call.

Distinctive Ringing (DRING) Assigns a cadence of rings to a business set for each line, and adds ring patterns fordifferent call types.

Drop Last Add-on Member (DROP) Lets a user drop the last call added to a conference call. This feature is used withthe Flexible Calling (FC) feature. It must be assigned to a higher key than the FC feature.



8-5

Denied Termination (DTM) Stops a line from receiving calls, which receive denied terminating (DNTR) treatment.

Executive Busy Override (EBO) Lets a station user access a busy station. To activate EBO, flash the switch hookduring the busy tone and dial an access code. On business sets, the user presses the EBO key to activate the EBOfeature. The calling station establishes a three-way conference with the busy station.

Executive Busy Override Exempt (EBX) Prevents call interruption by a station with EBO active.

Extended Call Management (ECM) Provides access to selected ECM and SCAI capabilities.

Emergency Key (EMK) Lets an ACD agent conference in a supervisor or auxiliary device if threatening or abusivecalls occur.

Executive Message Waiting (EMW) Provides a message waiting class of service (MCOS) to enhance the messagewaiting feature. A user can only access the MCOS that they have subscribed to.Forced Agent Availability(FAA) Lets an ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) supervisor force an ACD agent from theNot Ready to the Ready state. In the Ready state, the ACD agent can receive calls. Press the FAA key on the supervisorset to activate the FAA. Press an Agent key or dial the DN of an agent. An FAA key is valid for agents in a specificACD group.

Flexible Calling (FC) Lets the user establish multiple concurrent calls and join them into a conference of up to 30members. Flexible Calling works with the shared DN services provided by the EKTS MADN capability, so thatbridged MADN calls can be included in an FC conference. Flexible Calling allows the user to:

• Designate an established call as a conference call• Hold and retrieve a conference call• Bridge either an incoming or outgoing basic call into a conference call• Release, or drop, the last member to join the conference call• Transfer a conference call

Fast Transfer (FXR) Reduces the number of keystrokes required to transfer a call. The user does not need toconference all parties before transferring calls.Group Intercom All Calls (GIAC) Lets the users of business sets connected to an intercom group page selected groupmembers simultaneously and establish a conference with the paged members.

Group Intercom (GIC) Lets call termination on a member of a designated intercom group using abbreviated dialingaccess group members. The size of the group determines this dialing as follows:

" one digit (0-9) for groups of up to 10 members" two digits (00-99) for groups of up to 100 members" three digits (000-999) for groups of up to 1000 members" four digits (0000-9999) for groups of up to 10 000 members

Ground Start (GND) Checks consistency on ground start lines. The GND has a read-only function and is set in TableLNINV. Lines are ground or loop start. A ground start line is a line circuit arrangement that sends a dial tone. Theground start line sends a dial tone in response to a ground signal on the ring conductor. The calling station or privatebranch exchange applies this signal. A loop start configuration bridges the tip-and-ring conductors to accomplishseizure.

Permanent Hold (HLD) Lets a single-line set put a call on hold and return the handset to the handset cradle. The calleron hold hears a ringback tone, a recorded announcement, music, or silence.

Intercom (ICM) Lets a business set user terminate upon a pre-designated business set by pressing the ICM featurekey.

Internal / External Call Forward Busy (IECFB) Lets the system forward internal- and external-originated calls toremote stations in the customer group. Internal-originated calls are inside the customer group. External-originated callsare outside the customer group. IECFB can be added only to a line with the call forwarding busy (CFB) featureassigned.

Internal / External Call Forwarding Do Not Answer (IECFD) Lets the system forward internal- and external-originated calls to remote stations in the customer group. IECFD can be added only to a line with the call forwardingbusy (CFD) feature assigned.

Inspect Key (INSPECT) Displays the information on feature/DN keys and incoming calls to a DN. INSPECT alsoprovides information on the Call Waiting key and Intercom key without answering the call.



8-6

IP Client On an IP Phone (i.e. i200x), when synching from the switch, this feature allows the customer to look likethey are working with an i200x phone, even though the picture may appear incorrectly. When a station is synched in, ifIPCLIENT is present, then it will automatically change the Station Model to match value of IP_CLIENT_TYPE, unlessIP_CLIENT_TYPE is not supported in C3C.

Inhibit Ring Reminder (IRR) Lets the operating company shut off the ring reminder, a short ring occurring when thesystem forwards a call from the line of a subscriber. The ring reminds the subscriber that the line is call forwarded.

Conference Join (JOIN) Valid for the Station Controlled Conference (CNF) feature and the Three Way Conference(3WC) feature. A user can add an on-hold call to an existing conference. When adding the JOIN feature, the systemensures the presence of CNF or 3WC. CNF lets a station conference with up to 30 parties, without requiring anattendant, if the members belong to a station on a trunk. 3WC lets the subscriber place a call on hold, and set up arequest call to another subscriber. The subscriber can switch speech paths between the held and talking party, andconnect all parties into a three-port conference. With the three-way call in progress, the subscriber can press the 3WCkey again to drop the conference. After dropping the conference, the subscriber connects to a single-party call again.

Key Short Hunt (KSH) Lets incoming calls search for an idle DN on which to terminate. The search for this DNoccurs through a set of DN appearances on a business set.

Key Set Music On Hold (KSMOH) Lets a caller put on hold by a business set user connect to an audio source. Theoperating company defines the audio sources. When the business set user takes the call off hold, the system establishesthe call again on the DN line.

Line Music on Hold (LMOH) Lets a caller put on hold to connect an audio source, such as music.

Last Number Redial (LNR) Uses a single key to redials the last number dialed.

Last Number Redial Associated with Set (LNRA) Lets a set access any free (DN) on the set. When LNRA isactivated, the last number the user dialed from the set redials.

Line of Business (LOB) Lets an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agent enter a three-digit code for each call.Entering the code pegs a register for that LOB or type of call. This information tracks times for calls attributed to manyactivities. The customer defines the use of the codes and their meanings.

Line Overflow to Directory Number (LOD) Routes a call to a specified DN when all lines in a hunt group are busy.The specified DN can be part of a hunt group.

Line Hunt Overflow to a Route (LOR) Lets a hunt continue to a specified route when all lines in a hunt group arebusy.

Intra-LATA PIC (LPIC) Lets the user choose a primary carrier for Intra-LATA service. Parameter LCHOICE letssubscribers dial Intra-LATA calls on a casual basis.

18-Button Add-On for Meridian M5000 Series (M518) Provides an 18-button add-on unit to a Meridian M5000series (M5009, M5112, M5209, or M5312) business set.


36-Button Add-On for Meridian M5000 Series (M536) Provides a 36-button add-on unit to a Meridian M5000 series(M5009, M5112, M5209, or M5312) business set.

Meridian Business Station Camp-On (MBSCAMP) Lets a Meridian business set (MBS) user transfer a call to a busystation. If the it does not answer the call in a fixed time period, the call returns to the MBS and the transferred caller is"camped-on" to the busy station.

Malicious Call Hold (MCH) Lets a subscriber hold a connection in the switching unit on a malicious call so it can betraced back to the caller. MCH is not compatible with call-originating ISDN phone sets. During calls from an ISDNphone set, the user can press the MCH key and the MCH does not continue to hold the ISDN set. When the business settries to apply the MCH, the system generates log report. A user can make a call from an ISDN phone set to one of thefollowing:

" proprietary business set (PSET)" electronic business service (EBS)" Meridian Business Set (MBS)

Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MDN) Assigns a Directory Number (DN) to more than one set.



8-7

MDN Member Name (MDNNAME) Assigns names to multiple-appearance directory number (MDN) groups, andlets names be assigned to each secondary unit of an MDN group. These names appear on Meridian business sets duringcall activity. The display of the names provides more detailed calling information to the parties involved in the call.

Membership Display (MEMDISP) Lets the system send the member names of an MDN group across a network.

Multiline Hunt (MLH) Enables multiline hunting. Only a pilot DN associates with the hunt group. Hunting is linearand starts at the first line assigned to the pilot DN and ends at the last line.

MDN Ring Forwarding (MRF) Lets SCA MDN appearances have a delayed or abbreviated ring. The MRF featuresthese four ringing selections: always ring, never ring, abbreviated ring, or delayed ring. The MRF feature lets the ringalerting of a call ending on an MDN SCA group apply to one set of appearances of the MDN, and forwards the ringalerting to another set of appearances of the MDN. The subscriber activates ring forwarding automatically or manually.Ring forwarding has a 0, or 12 to 60 second timer.

MDN Ring Forwarding Manual (MRFM) Has four ringing options to MADN single call arrangement (SCA) groups:" abbreviated-the line appearance rings from call completion until the timer expires" delayed-the line appearance rings after the timer expires" always-the appearance rings from when the call completes on the MADN group until it is answered or

abandoned." never-the appearance does not ring when the call completes on the MADN group.

Make Set Busy Intragroup (MSBI) Allows each IBN station to appear busy to incoming calls. The system applies atemporary splash of ringing (500 ms) to the line to inform the station user of a diverted incoming call. MSBI causes thesystem to divert the incoming call. The line or directory number appears busy to intragroup calls only. MSBI does notblock external calls. When the MSBI blocks intragroup calls, the intragroup calls receive a busy tone.Make Set Busy (MSB) Lets each IBN station appear busy to incoming calls by causing it to divert incoming calls. Theline or DN appears busy to both external and intragroup incoming calls. The system applies a temporary ring (500 ms)to the line to inform the station user of a diverted call. The user can specify the type of treatment the system applies toexternal incoming calls. If the user does not specify a treatment, the system applies a busy tone as the default treatment.Intragroup calls always receive a busy tone when the MSB feature blocks intragroup calls.Message Waiting Indication (MWIDC) Lets a message center operator turn message waiting indication to ON for theuser telephone set. The ON message indicates that calls forwarded to the message center are ready for retrieval.Message Waiting (MWT) Lets a message center inform a user of a waiting message. Message Waiting is incompatiblewith Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MDN) non-primary members.Message Waiting Query (MWQRY) Lets a business set message center operator cancel a displayed DN. The user canmanually enter a correct DN to check messages for call retrieval. This procedure is necessary when calling the messagecenter from a different set for message retrieval.Name Display (NAME) Associates the name of a caller with a DN. If the name of the subscriber is not assigned to aDN, permanent name suppression occurs. The system uses the NAME feature to assign the name to a DN. If thesubscriber has a name assigned to a DN, the user can suppress the name of the subscriber.No Double Connect (NDC) Prevents a line from being connected to a verification or test circuit when the line is off-hook.Night Service (NGTSRVCE) ACD supervisor can press the Night Service key on the supervisor set to place the ACDagent sets, in an ACD group, in night service mode.

Observe Agent (OBS) Lets a supervisor observe conversations between an agent and a caller by pressing the OBS key.

Originating Line Select (OLS) Provides a business set with the following selection options for originating calls." When more than one line is idle, the system searches for an idle line. The search begins at the primary

directory number (PDN) and ends at the highest DN key. The handset must be off-hook to select an idle DN." The NO-LINE SELECT option requires a business set user to press the appropriate DN key manually, thus

selecting the originating line. The system provides silent treatment until the user selects the DN key. Theremoval of the handset does not select a DN appearance for origination.



8-8

Operator Number Identification (ONI) Directs calls to operator to identify the calling number. The operator comesinto the circuit when a subscriber dials a direct long distance call and it appears on an itemized bill.

Primary Inter-LATA Carrier (PIC) Assigns a PIC to a MDC line.

Preselect Carrier Identification (PCI) Supplies a previously selected carrier identification code to the subscriber’sDN, and provides a means of allowing or disallowing the use of override carrier identification codes for a given DN.

Pilot DN Billing (PILOT) Lets the system charge calls to a hunt group to the DN of the group. The billing recordcontains the pilot DN of the group. The system changes these calls to the DN of the group instead of one of thefollowing:

" the DN that the terminating office receives. Refer to feature RCVD." the DN of the line on which the call terminated. Refer to feature TERM.

Call Park (PRK) Allows a business set user to park a call against the directory number (DN) of the user. Retrieval ofthe parked call can occur from any station. When the call is parked, the user can originate and receive calls on that DN.

PASSWORD CICM features specifies password on a CICM.

Privacy Release (PRL) Lets single call announcement (SCA) multiple appearance directory number (MADN) usersestablish a conference call between an outside number and a maximum of 30 MADN lines.

Privacy (PRV) applies to all SCA lines with bridging capability and an initial privacy status of NONPRIVATE.Business set end-users can either have a dedicated PRV option key or can activate and cancel PRV by a dialed accesscode. 500/2500 set end-users must dial an access code to activate and cancel PRV. For business sets with a dedicatedPRVoption key, the PRVkey acts as a toggle that alternately activates and cancels privacy. The PRV key is datafilled inTable KSETFEAT. The PRV option does not have a lamp. For business sets and 500/2500 sets that use a dialed accesscode for controlling privacy, there is one access code that alternately activates and deactivates privacy. This code isdatafilled in Table IBNXLA.

Query Business Station (QBS) Lets the busy/idle status of a specific set be monitored. The querying set is alertedwhen a set becomes idle if it is busy when queried.

Query Time and Date (QTD) Lets a business set display the current time and date for 15 seconds. When anotheraction that uses the display is activated, the time and date display stops.

Ring Again (RAG) When a station user encounters a busy DN, RAG notifies the user when the busy station becomesidle. The system will automatically redial the same number.

Received Digits Billing (RCVD) Lets calls to a hunt group be billed to the digits received by the terminating office,rather than to the pilot DN of the group (see feature PILOT) or of the line on which the call terminated (see featureTERM). The DN of the originally dialed number is recorded in the billing record.

Reason Display (REASDSP) Lets individual business sets use display messages different than the rest of the customergroup. Associates a set of display messages (a "reason set") with a line. Display messages are defined in TableREASONS. If the REASDSP feature is assigned to a particular business set, the assigned reason set will override thereason set defined for the customer group.

Random Make Busy (RMB) Makes a hunt group line permanently busy to incoming calls when the RMB key isactivated. The affected line is a one-way outgoing line while RMB is activated. The RMB option provides amiscellaneous scan point circuit controlled by an external key. The same scan point can be assigned to one, several, orall lines within the hunt group, depending on the lines made busy.

Repeated Alert (RPA) Adds up to seven additional alert tones to a business set when a call terminates on a DN,MADN, GIC, or ACD key, and the set is already active on another key.

Requested Suspension (RSUS) Assigned when the subscriber requests suspension of service. When the RSUS featureis assigned, the treatments to which originations from and terminations to the subscriber line will be routed must bespecified.

Speed Calling Long List L30 (SC2) Lets customer call up to 30 frequently called numbers by dialing 20-49.

Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) Lets subscriber accept calls arriving from a limited set of previously identified DNs.The accepted DNs amassed through the subscriber list editing (SLE) facility. Rejected calls are given SCA treatment.

Selective Call Forwarding (SCF) Lets calls terminating on the line forward to a remote destination if the number ofthe originating station matches one of the numbers in the SCF list.



8-9

Serving Carrier Identification (SCI) Lets user assign a serving carrier identification (SCI) code to a DN or a LEN.

Speed Call Long List (SCL) Creates a speed dialing list. The customer list frequently called numbers that can becalled by dialing a two-digit speed calling code instead of the complete number.

Series Completion (SCMP) Redirects calls from a busy DN to another designated DN in the same office.

Selective Call Rejection (SCRJ) Lets a subscriber reject calls arriving from a limited set of previously identified DNs.

Speed Call Short List (SCS) Lets customer list frequently called numbers (to call, dial a one-digit speed calling code).Speed Call User Group (SCU) Lets a line be designated as a speed calling user in a speed calling group. A speedcalling user can only originate calls with speed calling and cannot affect the contents of the speed calling list.Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Assigned to a single-party plain old telephone service (POTS) line, adds asecondary DN to a Teen Service line. When no SDNs are assigned, adding the SDN option establishes Teen Service.SDN2 – SDN6 SDN Ringing Patterns: The Teen Service on MDC feature implements several ringing patterns. Thesepatterns let the user distinguish between calls for the PDN and each of the SDNs for the line. The system appliesringing patterns in a 6-s ringing cycle. For peripherals with FSR, the system allows one SDN.

Stop Hunt (SHU) Can cancel hunting at a line when activated. SHU can be assigned to one or more lines in a huntgroup.

Subscriber Line Usage (SLU) Allows a peg count of all originating and terminating calls on a line.

Simultaneous Ringing (SIMRING) Allows simultaneous incoming call notification for the members of a user-definedSimRing group. A SimRing group contains a single pilot DN (PDN) and up to four non-pilot member DNs (NPMDN).The simultaneous notification occurs when the SimRing group PDN receives a call. The first notified DN answeringthe call connects to the calling party. When the calling party connects to a member DN, the notified member DNs stopringing.

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Allows the recording of both billable and non-billable calls on a per legcall basis. The SMDR system uses the automatic message accounting (AMA) subsystem to collect call data andautomatically record it on a data storage device. The data storage devices (magnetic tape or disk) are controlled by theDevice Independent Recording Package (DIRP) subsystem. The data collected can be used for a customer’s internalbilling or for determining user calling habits and patterns.

Station Origination Restriction (SOR) Lets user of an attendant console, Meridian business set, or 2500 setdesignated as the controller station directly assign one of five origination-restriction levels to phones in the associatedcustomer group.

Station Origination Restrictions Controller (SORC) The SORC option allows an attendant console, Meridianbusiness set, or 2500 set to apply station origination restrictions against another directory number or a group of DN’s inthe same customer group. The station origination restrictions consist of a restriction level of 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. A level 0restriction permits all calls allowed by the NCOS to be completed. A level 1 restriction allows only intragroup calls andcalls specified in an exception list to be completed. A level 2 restriction allows only intragroup calls to be completed. Alevel 3 restriction allows only calls specified in an exception list to be completed. A level 4 restriction only allows 911emergency calls.

Special Billing (SPB) Lets billing be directed to a number other than the subscriber’s DN.

Station Specific Authorization Code (SSAC) Lets a set of 2-10 digit numbers be dialed from a specific station forpurposes of recording billing information and overriding station network class of service (NCOS) restrictions.

Suppress Line Identification Information (SUPPRESS) Stops phone number or name from displaying at calldestination.

Supervisor (SUPR) Establishes an automatic call distribution (ACD) supervisor set when assigned to key 1. Note: Thisfeature must be assigned before ACD supervisor features can be assigned to the set.

Suspended Service (SUS) Denies all service to a line with SUS assigned. The subscriber is blocked from originatingor receiving calls.



8-10

Service Group (SVCGRP) Lets features CLID (Calling Line Identification Display), NAME (Name Display) andREASDSP (Reason Display), packaged in a service group, be assigned to a selected line in a customer group(s). Aservice group is defined by the operating company and specifies which of the three features are included. Note: Aservice group cannot have REASDSP without CLID.

Terminating DN Billing (TERM) Lets calls to a hunt group be billed to the DN of the line on which the callterminated, rather than to the DN received by the terminating office (see feature RCVD) or the DN of the group’s pilot(see feature PILOT). The DN of the terminating line is recorded in the billing record.

Terminating Line Selection (TLS) If the TLS feature is not assigned to a set, the default is to automatically answerthe primary DN (key 1) when the user lifts the handset to answer a call. If the incoming call is not to the primary DN,the user must press the DN key associated with the incoming call. Provides two line selection sub-options foranswering calls:

" INCOMING - Automatically answered when the user lifts the handset from the cradle. If more than one callis incoming, the first call received is the first one answered. The user can override this option by pressing aDN key before lifting the handset.

" NOSELECT - Removing the handset from the cradle does not answer an incoming call. The user must pressthe DN key of the call to be answered otherwise the user hears silence.

Conference and Call-to-Call Transfer (TRANSFER) A sub-option of the Flexible Calling (FC) feature. TheTRANSFER sub-option is not provisionable on pre-NI-2 terminals. The TRANSFER sub-option allows a FlexibleCalling (FC) subscriber to establish the following types of transfers:

# Conference transfers, where remaining conferees continue to be connected to each other after the controllerexits

# Call-to-call transfers, where a party from one non-conference call is transferred to a party from another non-conference call

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Lets calls be distributed evenly among a number of predetermined sets.

Uniform Call Distribution Log (UCDLG) Lets the UCD line log in to a different UCD group.

USERID CICM Feature specifies User ID on CICM.

VOICEMAIL Associates voicemail box from voice mail server with a specified station.

WML Assigned to lines that route to a predefined DN if no digits are dialed within a modifiable time-out period.

Wake-Up call (WUC) Lets a subscriber set a time for the phone to ring.

(WUCR): Wake-Up Call Requests

Transfer a Conference Call (XFER) Lets a user transfer a conference call with more than two members. Theconference controller can leave the conference while the other two parties remain connected. This feature is used withthe FC option. The XFER feature is provisionable only on pre-NI-2 terminals.



9-1

9 Appendix – CS2000 Station Features ListThree-Way Calling (3WC) Lets the user place an existing call on hold and call another party. The user can thenswitch between parties or connect the three parties into a three-port conference.

Automatic Answer Back (AAB) Automatically answers incoming calls to primary directory number (PDN) at fourrings.

Answer Agent Key (AAK) Designates a secondary directory number (SDN) on the supervisor set to answer calls fromagents. Calls cannot originate from this key, nor can the user enter access codes with this key.

Automatic Call Back (ACB) Lets subscribers place a call to the last station that the subscriber called. If the line isbusy, ACB monitors the line until the line becomes idle and can accept the call.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Distributes large numbers of incoming calls to a minimum of one centraldirectory number, and/or to a fixed group of directory positions.

ACD Not Ready (ACDNR) Makes the ACD INCALLS key unavailable to receive automatic call distribution (ACD)calls. Releases an answered ACD call with the ACDNR key. Assign the ACDNR feature only if key 1 is an ACDINCALLS key.

Anonymous Caller Rejection (ACRJ) Lets a subscriber reject incoming calls from callers who block their names ordirectory numbers. The system routes anonymous calls to an announcement.

Answer Emergency Key (AEMK) Lets an automatic call distribution (ACD) agent immediately conference in asupervisor or an auxiliary device. The ACD agent can use this feature in the event of threatening or abusive calls.

Additional Functional Calls (AFC) A single functional call (SFC) is a single-call capability on a DN. The systemassigns an SFC feature to a call appearance a the user adds it to a logical terminal. Multiple call capacity for NI-1 setsare added to the SFC DN by assigning more functional call (AFC) members. Assign the AFC feature to the same key asthe assigned DN. You can assign up to four more calls for each SFC DN. The AFC members are identical to thecorresponding SFC DN.

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) Assigns Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) trigger behaviors to an agent.

Automatic Recall Dialable Directory Number (ARDDN) Lets subscribers dial a feature code to set up a call to theDN where the subscriber placed the last incoming call. The ARDDN delivers a dialable DN to the Automatic Recall(AR) option subscriber. The Dialable Directory Number (DDN) option shows the digits to dial. The AR optionprovides the last call recall capability.

Automatic Recall (AR) Lets a subscriber call the last station that called the subscriber. If the destination line is busy,AR monitors the line until the line becomes idle and can accept the call.

Agent Status Lamp (ASL) Lets a supervisor monitor the status of an agent position. This does not interfere with thecall. The lamp for the assigned agent status key will show the status of the call.

Automatic Time and Charge (ATC) An option offered subscribers for Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) calls. A timeand charge call is identified by a special category code. Associates a time and charge subscriber with the specialcategory code.

Automatic Dial (AUD) Lets business set subscribers call a number the subscriber dials regularly. The number can beprogrammed or changed. The number is called by pressing the AUD key.

Automatic Line (AUL) Connects to a predetermined location when off-hook is reported. The automatic line (AUL)feature connects to a set location when a directory number or an assigned AUL feature line reports an off-hook status.When the user assigns the AUL feature the system establishes the set location.

Automatic Display (AUTODISP) Caller ID feature automatically shows information on incoming calls. AUTODISPshows incoming call information (calling name, number) automatically on the display of Meridian Business Sets(MBS).

Bulk Calling Line Identification (BCLID) Lets the line receive call related information on incoming calls.

Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Provides Direct Call Selection (direct dialing to a monitored DN through the BLF key, andallows MBS users to monitor station status of a DN through MBS lamp states.

Bridged Night Number (BNN) Lets subscriber advertise a number for night service without adding a third wire.Assign BNNs to DN hunt, multiline hunt (MLH), and distributed line hunt (DLH) groups on an individual-line basis. If



9-2

necessary, the hunt can use the BNNs. If the BNNs form a hunt group, the hunt is in a sequence. If the BNN group hasthe CIR feature assigned, the hunt is not in a sequence.

Call Agent (CAG) Lets an automatic call distribution (ACD) supervisor call an agent position. The CAG feature andthe Observe agent (OBS) feature together allow an ACD supervisor to join an observed all.

Call Forwarding Busy Internal Calls Only (CBE) Stops forwarding of external calls. At the same time, permitsforwarding of intragroup calls to a remote station within the customer group.

Call Forwarding Busy Intragroup (CBI) Lets stations forward calls only to locations within predefined groups.

Call Forwarding Busy Unrestricted (CBU) Forwards Call Forwarding Busy calls to remote stations.

Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) Disables Call Waiting (CWT) during a call or when idle. If user activates CCW during acall, CCW cancels all CWT functions, including display, for that call. If activated during the idle state, CCW cancelsCWT functions for the next incoming or outgoing call. After the call is completed, Call Waiting is restored to the user'sline. Both Call Waiting (CW) and Cancel Call Waiting can reside on an analog station independently. If CW is beingdeactivated, CCW is automatically removed in C3C®, just as it is on the switch.

Customer Data Change (CDC) Lets a MAP Passthru end user modify line information.

Exclude External Calls from Call Forwarding (CDE) Prevents forwarding of calls from outside the customer group.

Exclude Intragroup Calls from Call Forwarding (CDI) Prevents forwarding of intragroup calls.

Call Forwarding Don't Answer Unrestricted (CDU) Forwards unanswered calls to remote station.

Call Forwarding Busy (CFB) When a station is busy, forwards incoming calls to another station in same customergroup.

Call Forwarding Don't Answer (CFD) Forwards calls not answered in specified time to a designated station orattendant.

Call Forwarding Do Not Answer Variable Timer (CFDVT) Lets an end user specify how long a call rings beforethe system forwards the call to another station.

Call Forward Fixed (CFF) Can forward calls from a station to a location determined by the operating company. Theuser cannot program the number to which the station forwards the calls.

Call Forward Intragroup (CFI) Lets stations forward calls only to locations in defined customer groups.

Call Forward Do Not Answer for Hunt Group (CFGD) Lets user assign call forwarding do not answer to separatehunt groups: directory number hunt (DNH), distributed line hunt (DLH), and multiline hunt (MLH). With CFGD, callsto idle hunt group stations ring for a set amount of time before the system forwards the calls. The system can forwardthe calls to the next station in the hunt sequence. The system can forward the calls to a DN in the same customer group.

Call Forward Per Key Basis (CFK) Lets station users forward each DN on a business set to separate DNs.

Call Forwarding MADN Secondary Number (CFMDN) Lets secondary units of a multiple appearance directorynumber (MADN) group activate or deactivate call forwarding (CFF, CFU and CFI only) from a station.

Call Forward Remote Access (CFRA) Lets single-line set use another line to activate or deactivate CFU, CFI, CFF,or CFW.

CFS Simultaneous / Screening (CFS) Lets the user call forward simultaneous multiple calls through a station.

Call Forward Universal (CFU) Lets incoming calls be rerouted to another telephone number. This number can be inthe MDC customer group, the local calling area, or a foreign exchange. The call can also be forwarded to an attendant.

Call Forward with Announcement (CFWANN) Provides an announcement to the caller if the system forwards thecall to a remote DN.

Call Hold (CHD) On a 500/2500 set, lets a subscriber hold a call. If a party does not go off-hook, the subscriber canhold a call indefinitely. While the call holds, the station with CHD can perform other tasks. Only one call can be onhold at a time.

Controlled Interflow (CIF) Lets a supervisor place an automatic call distribution (ACD) group in a controlledinterflow mode. A controlled interflow mode directs new incoming calls to a route determined by the customer in TableACDGRP.



9-3

Circular Hunt (CIR) Lets hunting complete a full cycle through a hunt group. CIR is not affected by the dialed DN.

Calling Line Flash (CLF) Lets a hold be placed on incoming calls in the switch. The hookswitch is flashed, then thesubscriber stays off-hook to hold an incoming call in the switch. After the CS2K receives the hookswitch flash, itgenerates a log report and an alarm at the central office. The subscriber can trace the call back to the originating party.The CLF feature does not work with call-originating ISDN telephone sets. A user can call from an ISDN phone set toan Integrated Business Network (IBN) line that has CLF assigned.

Call Supervisor (CLSUP) A single key that performs an automatic call distribution (ACD) to the supervisor. TheCLSUP key also answers calls from the supervisor that the CAG key originates.

Calling Name Delivery Blocking (CNAB) Lets the system block the delivery of the name of the caller.

Calling Name Delivery (CNAMD) Displays name of incoming caller and when the call occurred on the CPE.

Calling Number Delivery (CND) Displays the DN, time, and date of the call on the customer premises equipment(CPE).

Calling Number Delivery Blocking (CNDB) Blocks the delivery of the calling number.

Conference Calling (CNF) Lets a station have a conference call with up to 30 parties without an attendant. Themembers of the conference can belong to the same or different customer groups. The members also can belong to astation on a trunk.

Cutoff on Disconnect (COD) Applies an open battery signal to line after subscriber terminates call and timed releasedisconnect timing expires. The line feature COD idles line. The value of the office parameterCUTOFF_ON_DISC_TIME in table OFCVAR determines time of open interval. The COD feature overridesGLOBAL_CUTOFF_ON_DISCONNECT parameter, which routes the call to disconnect treatment after the openbattery signal.

Customer Oriented Trace (COT) Lets a customer that receives a malicious call request an automatic trace of thatcall.

Call Pickup (CPU) Lets station in an IBN customer group answer incoming calls to another station in same pickupgroup.

Call Transfer Waiting (CTW) Provides special tones in a 3-way call or call transfer that informs the conferees thatthe controlling party has not dropped out of the call.

Dial Call Waiting (CWD) Lets a business set user force call waiting on a busy station. The busy station can be a500/2500 set or a business set with a call waiting (CWT) feature key.

Call Waiting Intragroup (CWI) Lets CWT be applied to intragroup calls, in addition to those already allowed withCWT.

Call Waiting Originating (CWO) Lets an originating line automatically force a busy call line into call waiting.

Call Waiting Ringback (CWR) Informs caller if destination is idle or on a call. The user must assign CWR to theterminating line.

Call Waiting (CWT) Lets the system alert a busy station when an incoming call attempts to reach the DN.

Call Waiting Exempt (CWX) Stops Dial Call Waiting (CWD), Call Waiting Originating (CWO) from interrupting abusiness set user.

Call Waiting Ringback (CWR) Informs the caller if the destination is idle or engaged in another call. CXR isperformed after the user assigns CWR to the terminating line.Call Transfer (CXR) Allows one party to transfer a call to another station. The controlling party canremain on the line to ensure that the receiving station answers.Display Agent Status (DASK) With the press of single key, lets an automatic call distribution (ACD)supervisor monitor the status of the agent positions assigned to an ACD.Directed Call Pickup Barge-In (DCBI) Lets a station answer calls that ring on another line within thesame customer group. The same CS2K switch must serve the call for the DCBI to function. The calledstation can answer the call before the station initiating the call finishes the pickup sequence. In this case,the station initiating the call can interrupt the answered call and connect to a three-way call.



9-4

Directed Call Pickup Barge-In Exempt (DCBX) Lets a station block attempts of stations with DCBI tointerrupt the call.Denied Call Forwarding (DCF) Does not let a line receive forwarded calls, thus protecting computerports.Directed Call Park (DCPK) Lets the system put calls on hold or park calls against any valid DN. Thestation can have up to 100 calls parked at once. Any station can retrieve the calls.Directed Call Pickup (DCPU) Lets a station answer a ringing line in same customer group before thecalled party does.Directed Call Pickup Exempt (DCPX) Lets a station block stations with the directed call pickup barge-in(DCBI) or directed call pick-up (DCPU) features. Stations cannot interrupt or pickup a call that rings onthis station.

Dialable Directory Number (DDN) Lets the customer premises equipment (CPE) display incoming calling name,number, time, and date of the call. The CPE displays the number such that the called party can return the call.

Digitone (DGT) Lets a telephone set generate an address in the form of dual-tone multi-frequency signals.

Denied Incoming (DIN) Let selected lines receive incoming calls initiated outside the customer group.

Display (DISP) Denotes a business set on a PSET line as a display business set.

Distributed Line Hunt (DLH) The DLH is assigned to groups that require an equal distribution of calls, and permitsdistributed line hunting based on the follow stipulations:

• Only one pilot DN associates with the hunt group.• Line hunts start after the previous hunt finds the first idle line.• Line hunts continue until process reaches start point of the hunt. At the start point, the caller receives a busytone.• The caller does not receive a busy tone if the user assigns features Line Overflow to Directory Number

(LOD) or Line Overflow to Route (LOR) to the hunt group.

DN Directory Number

Do Not Disturb (DND) Lets an attendant restrict calls to a station or group of stations. While calls are restricted, theattendant must override DND to complete a call to the affected station(s).

Directory Number Hunt (DNH) Enables directory number hunting based on the follow stipulations:• Each line in the hunt group must have a directory number (DN).• The caller must dial the DN to access the hunt group.• The number of lines hunted depends on the hunting option (circular or linear) assigned to the DNH group." Circular hunting hunts all lines in the hunt group and does not consider the start point." Linear hunting starts at the number the caller dials and stops at the last number in the group.

Denied Origination (DOR) Does not let a line originate calls. If an attempt is made to originate a call from that line,the call receives originating suspended service (ORSS) treatment.

Display Queue Status (DQS) Lets an ACD supervisor display the load status information for an ACD group.

Display Queue Threshold (DQT) Illuminates a lamp to display the status of the incoming call queue. The statusappears when the ACD agent or supervisor presses the associated key of the set.

Distinctive Ringing (DRING) Assigns a cadence of rings to a business set for each line, and adds ring patterns fordifferent call types.

Drop Last Add-on Member (DROP) Lets a user drop the last call added to a conference call. This feature is used withthe Flexible Calling (FC) feature. It must be assigned to a higher key than the FC feature.

Denied Termination (DTM) Stops a line from receiving calls, which receive denied terminating (DNTR) treatment.

Executive Busy Override (EBO) Lets a station user access a busy station. To activate EBO, flash the switch hookduring the busy tone and dial an access code. On business sets, the user presses the EBO key to activate the EBOfeature. The calling station establishes a three-way conference with the busy station.

Executive Busy Override Exempt (EBX) Prevents call interruption by a station with EBO active.



9-5

Extended Call Management (ECM) Provides access to selected ECM and SCAI capabilities.

Emergency Key (EMK) Lets an ACD agent conference in a supervisor or auxiliary device if threatening or abusivecalls occur.

Executive Message Waiting (EMW) Provides a message waiting class of service (MCOS) to enhance the messagewaiting feature. A user can only access the MCOS that they have subscribed to.Forced Agent Availability(FAA) Lets an ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) supervisor force an ACD agent from theNot Ready to the Ready state. In the Ready state, the ACD agent can receive calls. Press the FAA key on the supervisorset to activate the FAA. Press an Agent key or dial the DN of an agent. An FAA key is valid for agents in a specificACD group.

Flexible Calling (FC) Lets the user establish multiple concurrent calls and join them into a conference of up to 30members. Flexible Calling works with the shared DN services provided by the EKTS MADN capability, so thatbridged MADN calls can be included in an FC conference. Flexible Calling allows the user to:

• Designate an established call as a conference call• Hold and retrieve a conference call• Bridge either an incoming or outgoing basic call into a conference call• Release, or drop, the last member to join the conference call• Transfer a conference call

Fast Transfer (FXR) Reduces the number of keystrokes required to transfer a call. The user does not need toconference all parties before transferring calls.Group Intercom All Calls (GIAC) Lets the users of business sets connected to an intercom group page selected groupmembers simultaneously and establish a conference with the paged members.

Group Intercom (GIC) Lets call termination on a member of a designated intercom group using abbreviated dialingaccess group members. The size of the group determines this dialing as follows:

" one digit (0-9) for groups of up to 10 members" two digits (00-99) for groups of up to 100 members" three digits (000-999) for groups of up to 1000 members" four digits (0000-9999) for groups of up to 10 000 members

Ground Start (GND) Checks consistency on ground start lines. The GND has a read-only function and is set in TableLNINV. Lines are ground or loop start. A ground start line is a line circuit arrangement that sends a dial tone. Theground start line sends a dial tone in response to a ground signal on the ring conductor. The calling station or privatebranch exchange applies this signal. A loop start configuration bridges the tip-and-ring conductors to accomplishseizure.

Permanent Hold (HLD) Lets a single-line set put a call on hold and return the handset to the handset cradle. The calleron hold hears a ringback tone, a recorded announcement, music, or silence.

Intercom (ICM) Lets a business set user terminate upon a pre-designated business set by pressing the ICM featurekey.

Internal / External Call Forward Busy (IECFB) Lets the system forward internal- and external-originated calls toremote stations in the customer group. Internal-originated calls are inside the customer group. External-originated callsare outside the customer group. IECFB can be added only to a line with the call forwarding busy (CFB) featureassigned.

Internal / External Call Forwarding Do Not Answer (IECFD) Lets the system forward internal- and external-originated calls to remote stations in the customer group. IECFD can be added only to a line with the call forwardingbusy (CFD) feature assigned.

Inspect Key (INSPECT) Displays the information on feature/DN keys and incoming calls to a DN. INSPECT alsoprovides information on the Call Waiting key and Intercom key without answering the call.

Inhibit Ring Reminder (IRR) Lets the operating company shut off the ring reminder, a short ring occurring when thesystem forwards a call from the line of a subscriber. The ring reminds the subscriber that the line is call forwarded.

Conference Join (JOIN) Valid for the Station Controlled Conference (CNF) feature and the Three Way Conference(3WC) feature. A user can add an on-hold call to an existing conference. When adding the JOIN feature, the systemensures the presence of CNF or 3WC. CNF lets a station conference with up to 30 parties, without requiring anattendant, if the members belong to a station on a trunk. 3WC lets the subscriber place a call on hold, and set up arequest call to another subscriber. The subscriber can switch speech paths between the held and talking party, and



9-6

connect all parties into a three-port conference. With the three-way call in progress, the subscriber can press the 3WCkey again to drop the conference. After dropping the conference, the subscriber connects to a single-party call again.

Key Short Hunt (KSH) Lets incoming calls search for an idle DN on which to terminate. The search for this DNoccurs through a set of DN appearances on a business set.

Key Set Music On Hold (KSMOH) Lets a caller put on hold by a business set user connect to an audio source. Theoperating company defines the audio sources. When the business set user takes the call off hold, the system establishesthe call again on the DN line.

Line Music on Hold (LMOH) Lets a caller put on hold to connect an audio source, such as music.

Last Number Redial (LNR) Uses a single key to redials the last number dialed.

Last Number Redial Associated with Set (LNRA) Lets a set access any free (DN) on the set. When LNRA isactivated, the last number the user dialed from the set redials.

Line of Business (LOB) Lets an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agent enter a three-digit code for each call.Entering the code pegs a register for that LOB or type of call. This information tracks times for calls attributed to manyactivities. The customer defines the use of the codes and their meanings.

Line Overflow to Directory Number (LOD) Routes a call to a specified DN when all lines in a hunt group are busy.The specified DN can be part of a hunt group.

Line Hunt Overflow to a Route (LOR) Lets a hunt continue to a specified route when all lines in a hunt group arebusy.

Intra-LATA PIC (LPIC) Lets the user choose a primary carrier for Intra-LATA service. Parameter LCHOICE letssubscribers dial Intra-LATA calls on a casual basis.



36-Button Add-On for Meridian M5000 Series (M536) Provides a 36-button add-on unit to a Meridian M5000 series(M5009, M5112, M5209, or M5312) business set.

Meridian Business Station Camp-On (MBSCAMP) Lets a Meridian business set (MBS) user transfer a call to a busystation. If the it does not answer the call in a fixed time period, the call returns to the MBS and the transferred caller is"camped-on" to the busy station.

Malicious Call Hold (MCH) Lets a subscriber hold a connection in the switching unit on a malicious call so it can betraced back to the caller. MCH is not compatible with call-originating ISDN phone sets. During calls from an ISDNphone set, the user can press the MCH key and the MCH does not continue to hold the ISDN set. When the business settries to apply the MCH, the system generates log report. A user can make a call from an ISDN phone set to one of thefollowing:

" proprietary business set (PSET)" electronic business service (EBS)" Meridian Business Set (MBS)

Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MDN) Assigns a Directory Number (DN) to more than one set.



9-7

MDN Member Name (MDNNAME) Assigns names to multiple-appearance directory number (MDN) groups, andlets names be assigned to each secondary unit of an MDN group. These names appear on Meridian business sets duringcall activity. The display of the names provides more detailed calling information to the parties involved in the call.

Membership Display (MEMDISP) Lets the system send the member names of an MDN group across a network.

Multiline Hunt (MLH) Enables multiline hunting. Only a pilot DN associates with the hunt group. Hunting is linearand starts at the first line assigned to the pilot DN and ends at the last line.

MDN Ring Forwarding (MRF) Lets SCA MDN appearances have a delayed or abbreviated ring. The MRF featuresthese four ringing selections: always ring, never ring, abbreviated ring, or delayed ring. The MRF feature lets the ringalerting of a call ending on an MDN SCA group apply to one set of appearances of the MDN, and forwards the ringalerting to another set of appearances of the MDN. The subscriber activates ring forwarding automatically or manually.Ring forwarding has a 0, or 12 to 60 second timer.

MDN Ring Forwarding Manual (MRFM) Has four ringing options to MADN single call arrangement (SCA) groups:" abbreviated-the line appearance rings from call completion until the timer expires" delayed-the line appearance rings after the timer expires" always-the appearance rings from when the call completes on the MADN group until it is answered or

abandoned." never-the appearance does not ring when the call completes on the MADN group.

Make Set Busy Intragroup (MSBI) Allows each IBN station to appear busy to incoming calls. The system applies atemporary splash of ringing (500 ms) to the line to inform the station user of a diverted incoming call. MSBI causes thesystem to divert the incoming call. The line or directory number appears busy to intragroup calls only. MSBI does notblock external calls. When the MSBI blocks intragroup calls, the intragroup calls receive a busy tone.Make Set Busy (MSB) Lets each IBN station appear busy to incoming calls by causing it to divert incoming calls. Theline or DN appears busy to both external and intragroup incoming calls. The system applies a temporary ring (500 ms)to the line to inform the station user of a diverted call. The user can specify the type of treatment the system applies toexternal incoming calls. If the user does not specify a treatment, the system applies a busy tone as the default treatment.Intragroup calls always receive a busy tone when the MSB feature blocks intragroup calls.Message Waiting Indication (MWIDC) Lets a message center operator turn message waiting indication to ON for theuser telephone set. The ON message indicates that calls forwarded to the message center are ready for retrieval.Message Waiting (MWT) Lets a message center inform a user of a waiting message. Message Waiting is incompatiblewith Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MDN) non-primary members.Message Waiting Query (MWQRY) Lets a business set message center operator cancel a displayed DN. The user canmanually enter a correct DN to check messages for call retrieval. This procedure is necessary when calling the messagecenter from a different set for message retrieval.Name Display (NAME) Associates the name of a caller with a DN. If the name of the subscriber is not assigned to aDN, permanent name suppression occurs. The system uses the NAME feature to assign the name to a DN. If thesubscriber has a name assigned to a DN, the user can suppress the name of the subscriber.No Double Connect (NDC) Prevents a line from being connected to a verification or test circuit when the line is off-hook.Night Service (NGTSRVCE) ACD supervisor can press the Night Service key on the supervisor set to place the ACDagent sets, in an ACD group, in night service mode.

Observe Agent (OBS) Lets a supervisor observe conversations between an agent and a caller by pressing the OBS key.

Originating Line Select (OLS) Provides a business set with the following selection options for originating calls." When more than one line is idle, the system searches for an idle line. The search begins at the primary

directory number (PDN) and ends at the highest DN key. The handset must be off-hook to select an idle DN." The NO-LINE SELECT option requires a business set user to press the appropriate DN key manually, thus

selecting the originating line. The system provides silent treatment until the user selects the DN key. Theremoval of the handset does not select a DN appearance for origination.



9-8

Operator Number Identification (ONI) Directs calls to operator to identify the calling number. The operator comesinto the circuit when a subscriber dials a direct long distance call and it appears on an itemized bill.

Primary Inter-LATA Carrier (PIC) Assigns a PIC to a MDC line.

Preselect Carrier Identification (PCI) Supplies a previously selected carrier identification code to the subscriber’sDN, and provides a means of allowing or disallowing the use of override carrier identification codes for a given DN.

Pilot DN Billing (PILOT) Lets the system charge calls to a hunt group to the DN of the group. The billing recordcontains the pilot DN of the group. The system changes these calls to the DN of the group instead of one of thefollowing:

" the DN that the terminating office receives. Refer to feature RCVD." the DN of the line on which the call terminated. Refer to feature TERM.

Call Park (PRK) Allows a business set user to park a call against the directory number (DN) of the user. Retrieval ofthe parked call can occur from any station. When the call is parked, the user can originate and receive calls on that DN.

Privacy Release (PRL) Lets single call announcement (SCA) multiple appearance directory number (MADN) usersestablish a conference call between an outside number and a maximum of 30 MADN lines.

Privacy (PRV) applies to all SCA lines with bridging capability and an initial privacy status of NONPRIVATE.Business set end-users can either have a dedicated PRV option key or can activate and cancel PRV by a dialed accesscode. 500/2500 set end-users must dial an access code to activate and cancel PRV. For business sets with a dedicatedPRVoption key, the PRVkey acts as a toggle that alternately activates and cancels privacy. The PRV key is datafilled inTable KSETFEAT. The PRV option does not have a lamp. For business sets and 500/2500 sets that use a dialed accesscode for controlling privacy, there is one access code that alternately activates and deactivates privacy. This code isdatafilled in Table IBNXLA.

Query Business Station (QBS) Lets the busy/idle status of a specific set be monitored. The querying set is alertedwhen a set becomes idle if it is busy when queried.

Query Time and Date (QTD) Lets a business set display the current time and date for 15 seconds. When anotheraction that uses the display is activated, the time and date display stops.

Ring Again (RAG) When a station user encounters a busy DN, RAG notifies the user when the busy station becomesidle. The system will automatically redial the same number.

Received Digits Billing (RCVD) Lets calls to a hunt group be billed to the digits received by the terminating office,rather than to the pilot DN of the group (see feature PILOT) or of the line on which the call terminated (see featureTERM). The DN of the originally dialed number is recorded in the billing record.

Reason Display (REASDSP) Lets individual business sets use display messages different than the rest of the customergroup. Associates a set of display messages (a "reason set") with a line. Display messages are defined in TableREASONS. If the REASDSP feature is assigned to a particular business set, the assigned reason set will override thereason set defined for the customer group.

Random Make Busy (RMB) Makes a hunt group line permanently busy to incoming calls when the RMB key isactivated. The affected line is a one-way outgoing line while RMB is activated. The RMB option provides amiscellaneous scan point circuit controlled by an external key. The same scan point can be assigned to one, several, orall lines within the hunt group, depending on the lines made busy.

Repeated Alert (RPA) Adds up to seven additional alert tones to a business set when a call terminates on a DN,MADN, GIC, or ACD key, and the set is already active on another key.

Requested Suspension (RSUS) Assigned when the subscriber requests suspension of service. When the RSUS featureis assigned, the treatments to which originations from and terminations to the subscriber line will be routed must bespecified.

Speed Calling Long List L30 (SC2) Lets customer call up to 30 frequently called numbers by dialing 20-49.

Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) Lets subscriber accept calls arriving from a limited set of previously identified DNs.The accepted DNs amassed through the subscriber list editing (SLE) facility. Rejected calls are given SCA treatment.

Selective Call Forwarding (SCF) Lets calls terminating on the line forward to a remote destination if the number ofthe originating station matches one of the numbers in the SCF list.

Serving Carrier Identification (SCI) Lets user assign a serving carrier identification (SCI) code to a DN or a LEN.



9-9

Speed Call Long List (SCL) Creates a speed dialing list. The customer list frequently called numbers that can becalled by dialing a two-digit speed calling code instead of the complete number.

Series Completion (SCMP) Redirects calls from a busy DN to another designated DN in the same office.

Selective Call Rejection (SCRJ) Lets a subscriber reject calls arriving from a limited set of previously identified DNs.

Speed Call Short List (SCS) Lets customer list frequently called numbers (to call, dial a one-digit speed calling code).Speed Call User Group (SCU) Lets a line be designated as a speed calling user in a speed calling group. A speedcalling user can only originate calls with speed calling and cannot affect the contents of the speed calling list.Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Assigned to a single-party plain old telephone service (POTS) line, adds asecondary DN to a Teen Service line. When no SDNs are assigned, adding the SDN option establishes Teen Service.SDN2 – SDN6 SDN Ringing Patterns: The Teen Service on MDC feature implements several ringing patterns. Thesepatterns let the user distinguish between calls for the PDN and each of the SDNs for the line. The system appliesringing patterns in a 6-s ringing cycle. For peripherals with FSR, the system allows one SDN.

Stop Hunt (SHU) Can cancel hunting at a line when activated. SHU can be assigned to one or more lines in a huntgroup.

Subscriber Line Usage (SLU) Allows a peg count of all originating and terminating calls on a line.

Simultaneous Ringing (SIMRING) Allows simultaneous incoming call notification for the members of a user-definedSimRing group. A SimRing group contains a single pilot DN (PDN) and up to four non-pilot member DNs (NPMDN).The simultaneous notification occurs when the SimRing group PDN receives a call. The first notified DN answeringthe call connects to the calling party. When the calling party connects to a member DN, the notified member DNs stopringing.

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Allows the recording of both billable and non-billable calls on a per legcall basis. The SMDR system uses the automatic message accounting (AMA) subsystem to collect call data andautomatically record it on a data storage device. The data storage devices (magnetic tape or disk) are controlled by theDevice Independent Recording Package (DIRP) subsystem. The data collected can be used for a customer’s internalbilling or for determining user calling habits and patterns.

Station Origination Restriction (SOR) Lets user of an attendant console, Meridian business set, or 2500 setdesignated as the controller station directly assign one of five origination-restriction levels to phones in the associatedcustomer group.

Special Billing (SPB) Lets billing be directed to a number other than the subscriber’s DN.

Station Specific Authorization Code (SSAC) Lets a set of 2-10 digit numbers be dialed from a specific station forpurposes of recording billing information and overriding station network class of service (NCOS) restrictions.

Suppress Line Identification Information (SUPPRESS) Stops phone number or name from displaying at calldestination.

Supervisor (SUPR) Establishes an automatic call distribution (ACD) supervisor set when assigned to key 1. Note: Thisfeature must be assigned before ACD supervisor features can be assigned to the set.

Suspended Service (SUS) Denies all service to a line with SUS assigned. The subscriber is blocked from originatingor receiving calls.



9-10

Service Group (SVCGRP) Lets features CLID (Calling Line Identification Display), NAME (Name Display) andREASDSP (Reason Display), packaged in a service group, be assigned to a selected line in a customer group(s). Aservice group is defined by the operating company and specifies which of the three features are included. Note: Aservice group cannot have REASDSP without CLID.

Terminating DN Billing (TERM) Lets calls to a hunt group be billed to the DN of the line on which the callterminated, rather than to the DN received by the terminating office (see feature RCVD) or the DN of the group’s pilot(see feature PILOT). The DN of the terminating line is recorded in the billing record.

Terminating Line Selection (TLS) If the TLS feature is not assigned to a set, the default is to automatically answerthe primary DN (key 1) when the user lifts the handset to answer a call. If the incoming call is not to the primary DN,the user must press the DN key associated with the incoming call. Provides two line selection sub-options foranswering calls:

" INCOMING - Automatically answered when the user lifts the handset from the cradle. If more than one callis incoming, the first call received is the first one answered. The user can override this option by pressing aDN key before lifting the handset.

" NOSELECT - Removing the handset from the cradle does not answer an incoming call. The user must pressthe DN key of the call to be answered otherwise the user hears silence.

Conference and Call-to-Call Transfer (TRANSFER) A sub-option of the Flexible Calling (FC) feature. TheTRANSFER sub-option is not provisionable on pre-NI-2 terminals. The TRANSFER sub-option allows a FlexibleCalling (FC) subscriber to establish the following types of transfers:

# Conference transfers, where remaining conferees continue to be connected to each other after the controllerexits

# Call-to-call transfers, where a party from one non-conference call is transferred to a party from another non-conference call

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Lets calls be distributed evenly among a number of predetermined sets.

Uniform Call Distribution Log (UCDLG) Lets the UCD line log in to a different UCD group.

Wake-Up call (WUC) Lets a subscriber set a time for the phone to ring.

(WUCR): Wake-Up Call Requests

Transfer a Conference Call (XFER) Lets a user transfer a conference call with more than two members. Theconference controller can leave the conference while the other two parties remain connected. This feature is used withthe FC option. The XFER feature is provisionable only on pre-NI-2 terminals.



10-1

10 Appendix – EWSD Station Features ListACFR- Automatic Callback with Flat Rate enables a subscriber to call back the last party dialed within a service area.If the party is busy, this feature automatically performs an activation when the called station becomes idle.ACIGO- Automatic Callback Inside Group Only allows the Automatic Callback to be restricted to within the group.ACTCFBL- Activate Call Forwarding Busy Line indicates the activation of call forward busy line. With this featurewhen the subscriber's line is busy, incoming calls are forwarded to a pre-specified directory number. Requires theCFBL feature.ACTCFDA- Activate Call Forwarding Don't Answer indicates the activation of call forwarding on no answer. Thisfeature allows calls terminating to an idle station (DN) to ring the call forwarded station (DN) if the call is notanswered after a customer-specified number of ring cycles. If the station to which the call is routed is busy, the originalstation continues to ring until the originating call is abandoned or the call is answered. Requires the CFDA feature.ACTCFV- Activate Call Forwarding Immediate indicates that calls are immediately forwarded to another specifieddirectory number. Requires the CFV feature.ACUS- Automatic Callback with usage Sensitive enables a subscriber to call back the last party dialed within a servicearea. If the party is busy, this feature performs an activation automatically when the called station becomes idle.ARFR- Automatic Recall lets a subscriber perform an activation procedure and to redial the last incoming callautomatically.BDND- Basic Do Not Disturb lets calls destined for a subscriber's DN be routed to a special Do Not Disturbannouncement or tone. The announcement can return answer supervision. The feature can be activated/deactivated bythe subscriber.BRGCE- Bridged Call Exclusion lets a TSP exclude DN Bridged calls via FA activate/deactivate keys or a toggle key.BRIDGED- Bridged Services lets up to four analog lines share a single directory number. Once a line originates a call,then another line, sharing the same DN, can bridge onto the call in progress.CACH- Call Appearance Call Handling permits Intercom Group Call Appearances and DN Call Appearances to beassigned.CCW- Cancel Call Waiting. Lets subscriber inhibit Call Waiting feature for duration of call. Subscriber dials thecancel call waiting access code and receives recall dial tone, and then dials a call. Any incoming calls receive normalbusy treatment.CFBL- Call Forwarding Busy Line redirects calls trying to channel to a subscriber's station when busy to anotherstation.CFBLIO- Restrict Call Forwarding Busy Line to Incoming Only: When the line is busy, the call is forwarded.CFDA- Call Forwarding Don't Answer. Lets calls terminating to an idle station ring that station for a customer-specified number of ringing cycles and, if not answered, to route to another station within the same switching system. Ifthe station to which the call is routed is busy, the original station continues to ring until the originator of the callabandons or the call is answered.CFDAIO- Call Forwarding Don't Answer Incoming Only allows call forwarding of the incoming calls upon no answer.CFIGO- Call Forwarding Within CENTREX Group Only allows calls within a CENTREX group onlyCFIO- Call Forwarding Incoming Only allows call forwarding of incoming calls onlyCFV- Call Forwarding Variable redirects calls attempting to terminate to one line to a customer-specified line. Thecustomer activates and deactivates this feature, and specifies the desired terminating address during each activationprocedure. When activated, calls forwarded while the line is idle cause a half-second ring on the forwarded line as areminder that the service is active.CHD- The ISDN Call Hold feature lets an ISDN user, while on any voice or circuit-mode data call, place that call onhold and make the B-channel (on that user's interface) available for another call. After placing the call on hold, the usercan retrieve the held call (resume the B-channel connection for that call) or initiate the release of the held call.CONFL- With the Conference Calling feature, after dialing the access code or pressing the feature key, the subscribercan sequentially call a maximum of five other parties and add them together to make up a 6-way call.CONFS3- Three Way Conference supports three-way calls by pressing CONFS3 key in conjunction with HOLD andRETRIEVE keys.CONFS6- Six Way Conference supports up to six parties in a conference call by pressing the CONFS6 key inconjunction with the HOLD and RETRIEVE keys.CPEDL- CPE Customer Premise Equipment Downloading reduces user’s need to program their ISDN phone. The userlocally programs the SPID (The identifier connecting the terminal to its profile) with the data needed by the terminalset via a download from the switch.CPU- Call Pickup groups are confined to one switch. The operation is unchanged by extension of a business group tomultiple switches.CTO- Call Transfer Outside indicates the Centrex group can add on calls outside the Centrex group.CTYPEX- Call Type Exists indicates that the command should be rejected if the DN/CT specified already exists.



10-2

CW- Call Waiting alerts the person talking that another call has been made to that line. The new incoming caller hearsringing. The CW service provides a "hold" feature activated by a switchhook flash. Consecutive flashes let thesubscriber alternately talk to the original party and the new caller. If the subscriber with Call Waiting hangs up whileone party is on hold, the subscriber is automatically rung back and connected to the held party.CWIO- Call Waiting Incoming Only restricts call waiting or Calling Identity Delivery on Call Waiting (CIDCW) toincoming calls to the CENTREX group via DDD only.CWO- If a Call Waiting Originating subscriber calls a busy line, the subscriber hears ringing instead of a busy tone.The called party hears the call waiting tone, and can flash the hookswitch, placing the current call on hold andconnecting with the CWO subscriber. If the called party hangs up, the call is released, and the station rings. Uponanswer, the called party is connected with the CWO subscriber. CWO service allows the subscriber to assign the CallWaiting (terminating) service to a called party for the duration of the call.DLPA- Assigns a functional key to drop the last party added (via RETRIEVE key) to a three-way or a large conferencecall, and should be assigned in conjunction with FA CONFS3 or FA CONFS6.DN- Directory Number

DPN- The ISDN Call Pick-Up without Barge-In is an originating feature lets a terminating call directed to a given DNbe answered by a user on another DN. The DN must be assigned this feature and be within the same customer group.When requesting I-DPN, the user specifies a particular DN on which I-DPN is to be invoked. The VI call answered hasbeen receiving terminating treatment the longest.DPU- With the Directed Call Pickup feature, the subscriber dials a code followed by the station number to pick up ananswered or ringing call at another telephone [provided the ringing or talking party has the Dial Pick-Up (DPUclassmark) assigned]. If the other station has answered, a three-way call is establishedEKTS- ISDN Electronic Key Telephone Service is a central office-based key system service offering the end user anenhanced alternative to the existing stand alone customer premises key systems. EKTS lets operating companies offerkey telephone service from the central office using ISDN facilities rather than making the subscriber provide on-premises equipment for the feature. Telephone sets (terminals) can have multiple DNs without having to providemultiple analog lines to the terminals. These terminals are grouped so that DNs can be shared, an intercom capabilitycan be offered, and various alerting and bridging functions can be used. This service lets a terminal connect to thenetwork via the standard single two-wire loop or an ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) line. It provides multiple stationset appearances of a single DN, multiple DN appearances on a single station set, bridged call capability (both on ashared DN and across two DNs), intercom calling, privacy capability to prevent bridging, hold, and various alertingcapabilities.EKTSPDOH- The EKTS Privacy Deactivation On-Hold value deactivates privacy when the user that activated thefeature puts the call on hold. This hold action occurs when this user is the only one connected to the call which, andtherefore puts the call on hold against the EKTS group. The hold action occurs when another EKTS connected to thecall (part of the same EKTS group). In this case, the call is held only at the user's terminal.EKTSPMB- The EKTS Position Make Busy value lets an EKTS terminal be put in a "make busy" state so that theEKTS subscriber can perform tasks without being interrupted by calls and/or physically take leave of the terminalwithout concern for unanswered calls.EKTSPOO- The EKTS Privacy On Origination value makes private an EKTS DN call upon origination by theISDN/EKTS user.EKTSTSP- Electronic Key Telephone Service Terminal Service Profile.

HOTLINE- The subscriber can arrange with the carrier to be routed to a predefined number for all calls. Thispredefined number can be associated with either the subscriber's ANI or the subscriber's Authorization Code. It isadded to the station during the Switch Synchronization process. The Hotline DN prompt is a required value.ICOM- Intercom Calling assigns the Intercom Calling feature to a TSP, and allows intercom calls between EKTSISDN telephones.LCPARK- Local Call Park lets the subscriber park calls only against its own DN, and is only valid for analogsubscribers.MSGSERV- Message Desk Service indicates authorization to use the service of a message desk center.NOCFIND- No Call Forwarding Variable Indicator does not provide distinctive ringing to the terminating line(forward to number) to indicate that the incoming call is a forwarded call.NOTIFY- A message sent from the switch to the terminal to notify it of an incoming message.

OBCHLIM- One B-Channel Limit limits the number of B-channels that an ISDN terminal can access at a time. Ifmore than one terminal shares a TSP, all of the terminals sharing it can only access a maximum of one B-channel at atime.POANSWER- Privacy On Answer immediately activates the manual privacy capability which prevents multipleanswers on a terminating call for an EKTS subscriber.



10-3

RRNG- Reminder Ring indicates that the subscriber's phone with this feature will ring once when receiving anincoming call, but will be automatically forwarded to a specified directory number, or a fixed announcement.SERCOMP- Series Completion routes calls to a busy DN to another DN within the same switching office. DNs mustbe grouped in a pre-arranged ordered list. Hunting is done through the series completion chain until an idle line isencountered or the end of the chain is reached. The DNs in the group do not need to be in a sequence. However, theseries completion DN must be in the same office.When a calling party dials a DN that has Series Completion Service, no indication is given that hunting is taking place.If all the DNs are busy, the calling party receives a busy treatment. Toll restriction is not applied when SeriesCompletion is recurring to the Series Completed DN. Billing is not performed for the Series Completed leg of the call.A customer can have as many numbers in a series completion chain as desired. However, the chain stops hunting aftersixteen busy lines have been encountered since the start of hunt. The hunt starts with a calling DN and stops when anidle DN is found, when eight busy lines have been found, or when the last DN in the hunt chain is encountered thatdoes not have the series completion feature.SPD30- Speed Calling 30 indicates that 30-number speed calling applies to this MLHG DN. SPD30 is assigned fromthe Operating Telephone Company using MML commands, and lets up to 30 DNs be associated with a unique, 2-digit,abbreviated dialing code in the range of 20-49. Upon reception of a valid dialing code, the EWSD system completes thecall to the associated DN. Speed Calling can be assigned to either the MLHG group or to individual members of aMLHG. The Shared Speed 30 feature is now added to the station correctly during the Switch Synchronization process.SPD8- Speed Calling 8 indicates that single digit (2-9) calling applies to this MLHG DN. SPD8 is activated from theOTC using MML commands. SPD8 allows up to eight DNs to be assigned with a unique, 1-digit, abbreviated dialingcode (2-9). Upon reception of a valid dialing code, the EWSD system completes the call to the associated DN. SpeedCalling can be assigned to either the MLHG group or to individual members of a MLHG.TOGBRGCE- Toggle Bridged Call Exclusion Assigns a feature activation key to activate the Bridged Call Exclusionfeature so that the user making a call on a call appearance is assured that user on another terminal cannot bridge ontothe call. When the activate key is initially pressed, the Bridged Call Exclusion feature is activated and all DN/CT callappearances are excluded from DN bridging. When the key is pressed again, DN bridging will be allowed on allDN/CT call appearances. DN bridging can also be assigned the FA ACTBRGCE and DACBRGCE keys.TWC- With the Three-Way Calling feature, a subscriber can add a third party to an existing call without operatorassistance. After establishing a two-party call, the subscriber creates a three-way call as follows:

• The subscriber flashes the switchhook once. This action places the second party on hold.• The subscriber receives a recall dial tone.• The subscriber dials the third party.• When third party is on line, the subscriber flashes the switchhook again, and establishes the three-way

connection.The second switchhook flash can occur after dialing is completed. The subscriber can add a third party regardless ofwho originated the first call. After the three-way connection is established, the subscriber can drop the third party asfollows:

• The subscriber flashes the switchhook once.• The subscriber places the receiver back on-hook.

If either of the other two parties hang up while the subscriber is still off-hook, the three-way call is returned to a normaltwo-party connection (between remaining parties). If the subscriber goes on-hook while the second party is on hold, thesubscriber receives ringback tone. If the subscriber answers within one minute, a normal two-party connection isestablished. Both parties are released if the subscriber does not answer within a minute or if the party on hold goes on-hook.UPCFBLDN- Update Call Forward Busy Line Directory Number lets the subscriber change, via SCI, the remotedirectory number to which calls are forwarded when the base station is busy.UPCFDADN- Update Call Forward Don't Answer Directory Number (UPCFDADN) lets the subscriber change, viaSCI, the remote DN to which calls are forwarded after the base station has been rung for a specified period of time withno answer.UPCFRC- When the Update Call Forwarding Don't Answer Ring Cycle value is enabled, the Call Forwarding Don'tAnswer Ring Cycle parameter value (CFRC) can be changed.UPCFVDN- Update Call Forward Variable Directory Number lets a subscriber change, via SCI, the remote directorynumber to which calls are forwarded from the base station.UPSPD30- Update Speed Calling 30 indicates that the subscriber has chosen Speed Calling 30 with the update feature.The Speed Calling feature allows the subscriber to specify a list of numbers, each with a unique abbreviated dialingcode. Upon reception of a valid code, the EWSD system completes the call to the associated DN. The subscriber canupdate a list for UPSPD30 by dialing 75, then entering a 2-digit code (20-49), followed by the complete DN to beadded to the list. After the subscriber makes a change to a list, the EWSD system alerts the subscriber that the changehas been accepted.



10-4

UPSPD8- Update Speed Calling 8 indicates that the subscriber has chosen Speed Calling 8 with the update feature.This feature lets the subscriber specify a list of numbers, each with a unique abbreviated dialing code. On reception of avalid code, the system completes the call to the associated DN. An entry in UPSPD8 lets a subscriber update a list of upto eight numbers from the subscriber's station. The subscriber can update a list for UPSPD8 by dialing 74, then enteringa single-digit code (2-9), followed by the complete DN to be added to the list. After the subscriber makes a change to alist, the system alerts the subscriber that the change has been accepted.



11-1

11 Appendix – CS1K Station Features ListStrata Group will support SS, ADD, MODIFY, and DELETION of the features listed against the listed settypes.

11.1 Basic FeaturesAO3 3 party conference - Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum is three or six,depending on the Conference feature assigned to the conference call originator. Not all conference parties have to belocal to the system, although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN) to uphold the conference connection.The attendant can also establish six-party conferences.AO6 6 party conference - Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum is three or six,depending on the Conference feature assigned to the conference call originator. Not all conference parties have to belocal to the system, although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN) to uphold the conference connection.The attendant can also establish six-party conferences.AAK Automatic Answerback, when assigned to a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, lets any incoming call to a singleappearance Prime Directory Number (PDN) be answered automatically. An incoming call will ring one time, then thesystem will turn on Handsfree and establish a speech path. When either party hangs up, the call is automaticallydisconnected.CWT Call Waiting notifies a telephone user on an established call (internal or external) that an external call is waiting tobe answered. Meridian 1 proprietary telephones must have a Call Waiting key/lamp pair assigned and a Class of Servicethat allows a warning tone. Call Waiting is applicable to the Prime DN or any single appearance DN on the telephone.When an external call comes into a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone and the telephone user is on a call, the Call Waitinglamp flashes and a buzz sounds through the telephone’s speaker.LNK Last Number Redial, which is defined on a customer and a telephone basis, allows the last number dialed by a userto be automatically stored. The stored number can be redialed by pressing a key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, orby dialing SPRE + 89 on analog (500/2500 type) telephones. The number is stored whether the call rings, is busy oranswered, or a valid access code is dialed with the number. Only one number, composed of up to 32 digits (includingaccess codes), can be stored at any one time. The new number overwrites the previously stored number.PRK Call Park places a call in a parked state, similar to hold, where it can be retrieved by an Attendant Console ortelephone. A parked call must have an access ID, also known as a Park DN. This is done by parking the call on a SystemPark DN or on any telephone DN in the system. A parked call does not occupy a DN, nor is there a lamp to indicate itspresence.PRS Privacy Release - In multiple appearance single call arrangements of Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, PrivacyRelease allows one other appearance of the Directory Number (DN) to enter the call. Privacy is then reestablished untilPrivacy Release is activated again.RGA Ring Again lets you, after encountering a busy DN, ring the DN again when it becomes free. If a dialed DN isbusy, or if all the trunks are busy, pressing the Ring Again key asks the system to monitor the dialed DN or trunk. Whenit becomes available, the system notifies you. The call is automatically dialed again when you press the Ring Again key asecond time.TRN Call Transfer allows a telephone user on any two-party call to hold the existing call and originate another call to athird party. The user may consult privately or transfer the original call to the third party. A call is transferred by pressinga dedicated key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or by flashing the switchhook on analog (500/2500 type)telephones.

11.2 Complex FeaturesCFW Call Forward automatically forwards incoming calls to another destination, within or outside the system. Onlycalls to the Prime DN or any single-appearance DN on the telephone are forwarded. Outgoing calls can still be placedfrom the telephone when Call Forward is active.

Documents

Communications Network Management System